WO2018163336A1 - Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program - Google Patents

Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018163336A1
WO2018163336A1 PCT/JP2017/009310 JP2017009310W WO2018163336A1 WO 2018163336 A1 WO2018163336 A1 WO 2018163336A1 JP 2017009310 W JP2017009310 W JP 2017009310W WO 2018163336 A1 WO2018163336 A1 WO 2018163336A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
operation mode
battery
communication device
remaining amount
control unit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/009310
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
石井 謙介
さおり 松本
新 篠崎
由貴 佐藤
Original Assignee
オリンパス株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by オリンパス株式会社 filed Critical オリンパス株式会社
Priority to PCT/JP2017/009310 priority Critical patent/WO2018163336A1/en
Publication of WO2018163336A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018163336A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an imaging device, a communication device, an imaging system, an imaging mode control method, and a program.
  • Patent Document 1 A digital camera that transfers image data to another terminal according to conditions is disclosed in Patent Document 1. If the remaining battery level is insufficient after the image is taken, the digital camera does not transfer image data.
  • the digital camera disclosed in Patent Document 1 can communicate data other than image data. Communication for data other than image data consumes power for photographing.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide an imaging device, a communication device, an imaging system, an imaging mode control method, and a program that are unlikely to cause a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in a remaining battery level during communication.
  • the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a memory, a communication device, a control unit, and a user interface.
  • the memory stores a first remaining battery level that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Judging.
  • the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control executed by the control unit is received from the communication device by the communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device.
  • the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. This is an operation mode for executing imaging based on the above.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the control unit when the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit transmits the setting information to the You may receive from the said communication apparatus with a communication apparatus.
  • the setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device when the imaging device is operating in the second operation mode.
  • the control unit may switch the operation mode of the imaging apparatus from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the control unit may count the number of the image data generated by the image sensor executing the imaging.
  • the control unit may determine whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of the counted image data.
  • the control unit may increase the first battery remaining amount.
  • the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit may determine whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor performs the imaging. When the control unit determines to increase the second battery remaining amount, the control unit may increase the second battery remaining amount.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  • the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit may increase the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery amount.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  • the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit determines whether the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. May be. During charging of the battery, the control unit determines that priority is given to increasing the remaining amount of the first battery and the remaining amount of the second battery according to an increase in the remaining amount of the battery. May be given priority over other battery levels.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  • the memory may further store a first battery capacity and a second battery capacity.
  • the controller may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio.
  • the first battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the first operation mode and not assigned to the second operation mode.
  • the second battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the second operation mode and not assigned to the first operation mode.
  • the first ratio may be a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity.
  • the second ratio may be a ratio of the second battery remaining amount to the second battery capacity.
  • the communication device includes a memory, a first communication device, and a control unit.
  • the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface.
  • the memory stores a first remaining battery level that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Judging.
  • the control unit transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the first communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the second communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. .
  • the second communication device In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface.
  • This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the control unit A switching instruction may be transmitted to the imaging apparatus by the first communication device.
  • the setting information may indicate content set in the imaging device when the imaging device is operating in the second operation mode.
  • the control unit includes the first battery based on the number of the image data generated by the image sensor executing the imaging. It may be determined whether or not the remaining amount is increased. When the control unit determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit may increase the first battery remaining amount.
  • the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit may determine whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor performs the imaging. When the control unit determines to increase the second battery remaining amount, the control unit may increase the second battery remaining amount.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  • the control unit may transmit method information to the imaging device by the first communication device.
  • the method information may indicate a method of updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount during charging of the battery.
  • the updating method may be a method in which the first battery remaining amount is increased in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery amount.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  • the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the control unit determines whether the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. May be.
  • the control unit may transmit method information to the imaging apparatus by the first communication device.
  • the method information may indicate a method for updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount during charging of the battery.
  • the remaining battery level determined to increase preferentially among the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery level. It may be a method of increasing priority over the method.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  • the memory may further store a first battery capacity and a second battery capacity.
  • the controller may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio.
  • the first battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the first operation mode and not assigned to the second operation mode.
  • the second battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the second operation mode and not assigned to the first operation mode.
  • the first ratio may be a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity.
  • the second ratio may be a ratio of the second battery remaining amount to the second battery capacity.
  • the imaging system includes an imaging device and a communication device.
  • the communication device includes a memory, a first communication device, and a first control unit.
  • the imaging apparatus includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, a second control unit, and a user interface.
  • the memory stores a first remaining battery level that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery.
  • the first control unit can continue the operation of the imaging device in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Determine whether or not.
  • the first control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the first control unit transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device. To do.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the second control unit receives the switching instruction from the communication device by the second communication device.
  • the second control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus from the first operation mode to the second operation mode based on the received switching instruction.
  • the second communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the second communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control executed by the second control unit is received from the communication device by the second communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device.
  • the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface.
  • This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the imaging mode control method includes a first step and a second step.
  • the first step when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, in the imaging device, the imaging device performs an operation in the first operation mode based on a first remaining battery level. It is a step of determining whether or not it can be continued.
  • the second step when it is determined that the imaging apparatus cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, in the imaging apparatus, the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. This is a step of switching to the operation mode.
  • the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery.
  • the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device.
  • the communication device In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface.
  • This is an operation mode for executing imaging based on the above.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the imaging mode control method has a first step and a second step.
  • the first step when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the imaging device continues to operate in the first operation mode in the communication device based on the first remaining battery level. This is a step of determining whether or not it is possible.
  • the second step is a step of transmitting a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device in the communication device when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode. is there.
  • the communication device includes the first communication device.
  • the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the second communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the second communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. .
  • the second communication device In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface.
  • This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the program is a program for causing the computer of the imaging apparatus to execute the first step and the second step.
  • the first step when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level.
  • This is a step for determining whether or not.
  • the second step is a step of switching the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode. It is.
  • the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery.
  • the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device.
  • the communication device In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface.
  • This is an operation mode for executing imaging based on the above.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the program is a program for causing the computer of the communication device to execute the first step and the second step.
  • the first step when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, whether or not the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level.
  • This is a step for judging.
  • the second step is a step of transmitting a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the communication device includes the first communication device.
  • the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed.
  • the first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the second communication device.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the second communication device.
  • the third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. .
  • the second communication device In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface.
  • This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication is less likely to occur.
  • 1 is a configuration diagram of an imaging system according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 1 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an imaging apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation
  • FIG. 1 shows a configuration of an imaging system 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the imaging system 1 includes an imaging device 10, a communication device 20, and a lens module 30.
  • a shutter button 151 and a power button 152 are arranged on the surface of the imaging device 10.
  • the communication device 20 performs wireless communication with the imaging device 10.
  • a display 240 is disposed on the back surface of the communication device 20.
  • the communication device 20 is an image display device.
  • the lens module 30 includes lenses such as a focus lens and a zoom lens. In FIG. 1, the lens module 30 is attached to the imaging device 10.
  • the imaging device 10 and the lens module 30 may be separable.
  • the imaging device 10 may have a lens in the lens module 30.
  • the communication device 20 functions as a control device that controls the imaging device 10.
  • the communication device 20 may be an image storage device that stores image data acquired by the imaging device 10.
  • FIG. 2 shows the configuration of the imaging apparatus 10.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 includes an image sensor 100, a battery 110, a memory 120, a communication device 130 (second communication device), a control unit 140 (second control unit), and a user interface 150. .
  • the memory 120 stores a first battery remaining amount that is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. To do.
  • the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the communication device 130 can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device 20, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operation mode in which at least one of the following is executed.
  • the first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor 100 performing imaging to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the second process is a process in which control information used for control executed by the control unit 140 is received from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the third process is a process for executing at least one of image processing on image data and addition of information on image data based on an instruction received from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the communication device 130 cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device 20, and the image sensor 100 is based on an operation via the user interface 150.
  • This is an operation mode for executing imaging.
  • the first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the image sensor 100 is an image pickup device (imager) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor.
  • imager image pickup device
  • the image sensor 100 generates an imaging signal by executing imaging.
  • the image sensor 100 performs imaging based on the control information transmitted from the communication device 20. Alternatively, the image sensor 100 performs imaging based on an operation via the user interface 150.
  • the imaging signal generated by the image sensor 100 is converted into image data by an A / D converter not shown in FIG.
  • the image sensor 100 may include an A / D converter, and the image sensor 100 may generate image data.
  • the image data is still image data, moving image data, and live image data. Shooting in each embodiment includes imaging by the image sensor 100 and various processes associated with imaging.
  • the battery 110 is a rechargeable battery that can be repeatedly charged.
  • the battery 110 is a lithium ion rechargeable battery.
  • the battery 110 stores electric power for the operation of the imaging device 10.
  • the battery 110 is built in the imaging device 10.
  • the first battery capacity is a battery capacity assigned to the first operation mode.
  • the first battery capacity is larger than 0 and smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110.
  • the battery capacity decreases due to the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the first operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining capacity is a remaining capacity obtained by subtracting the capacity reduced by the operation in the first operation mode from the first battery capacity.
  • the first battery remaining amount may be represented by the total capacity of the battery 110 or a ratio (%) to the first battery capacity.
  • the memory 120 is a volatile or non-volatile memory.
  • the memory 120 RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (DynamicRandom Access Memory), SRAM (Static Random Access Memory), ROM (Read Only Memory), EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read -Only Memory) and at least one of flash memory.
  • the memory 120 stores image data generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. Furthermore, the memory 120 stores the first battery capacity and the first remaining battery level. Furthermore, the memory 120 stores the operation mode and parameters set in the imaging device 10.
  • the communication device 130 is a wireless module and performs wireless communication with the communication device 20 via an antenna not shown in FIG.
  • wireless communication is performed according to standards such as WiFi (registered trademark) and Bluetooth (registered trademark).
  • the imaging device 10 and the communication device 20 may be connected by a cable, and the communication device 130 may communicate with the communication device 20 via the cable.
  • communication via a cable is performed in accordance with a standard such as USB (Universal Serial Bus).
  • the control unit 140 is a controller.
  • the control unit 140 includes at least one of a processor and a logic circuit.
  • the processor is at least one of a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), and a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit).
  • the logic circuit is at least one of an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) and an FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array).
  • the controller 140 can include one or more processors.
  • the control unit 140 can include one or more logic circuits.
  • the control unit 140 executes control based on the state of the imaging device 10 and the control information received from the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 140 may read a program including an instruction that defines the operation of the control unit 140 and may execute the read program. That is, the function of the control unit 140 may be realized by software.
  • This program may be provided by a “computer-readable recording medium” such as a flash memory.
  • the above-described program may be transmitted from the computer having a storage device or the like in which the program is stored to the imaging device 10 via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium.
  • a “transmission medium” for transmitting a program is a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line.
  • the above-described program may realize a part of the functions described above.
  • the above-described program may be a difference file (difference program) that can realize the above-described function in combination with a program already recorded in the computer.
  • the control unit 140 transmits image data or information to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. Specifically, the control unit 140 controls the communication device 130 so that image data or information is transmitted to the communication device 20. That is, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to transmit image data or information for the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 transmits image data or information to the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 140 receives information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. Specifically, the control unit 140 controls the communication device 130 so that information is received from the communication device 20. That is, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to receive information transmitted from the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 receives information from the communication device 20.
  • the user interface 150 is an operation unit and receives an instruction corresponding to the control command from the user.
  • the control command will be described later.
  • the user interface 150 is at least one of a button, a switch, a key, and a touch panel.
  • the user interface 150 includes a shutter button 151 and a power button 152 shown in FIG.
  • the shutter button 151 receives a shooting instruction from the user.
  • the image sensor 100 executes a still image or a moving image.
  • the shooting instruction includes a shooting start instruction and a shooting end instruction.
  • the image sensor 100 starts shooting a moving image.
  • the image sensor 100 ends the moving image shooting.
  • the image sensor 100 may start capturing a moving image, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, the image sensor 100 may end the moving image capturing.
  • the power button 152 receives a power on / off instruction from the user.
  • the power button 152 receives a power-on instruction while the imaging device 10 is off, the power supply from the battery 110 is started, thereby turning on the imaging device 10.
  • the power button 152 receives a power-off instruction while the imaging device 10 is on, the power supply from the battery 110 is stopped, whereby the imaging device 10 is powered off.
  • the control information includes at least one of a control command, setting information, and image additional information.
  • the control command is information such as a live display start instruction, a shooting instruction (imaging instruction), a parameter setting instruction, an image transfer instruction, an image processing execution instruction, a switching instruction, and a power-off instruction.
  • the live display start instruction indicates that display of a live image is started.
  • the live image is composed of a plurality of image data (live image data) generated by the image sensor 100 continuously performing imaging.
  • the live image is displayed on the display 240 of the communication device 20.
  • the user confirms the composition with the displayed live image.
  • the shooting instruction indicates that shooting (imaging) is performed.
  • the parameter setting instruction indicates that a parameter is set in the imaging apparatus 10.
  • the image transfer instruction indicates that image data is transferred from the imaging device 10 to the communication device 20.
  • the image processing execution instruction indicates that at least one of image processing for image data and information addition processing for image data is performed.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched.
  • the power-off instruction indicates that the power of the imaging device 10 is turned off.
  • the setting information is a parameter set in the imaging apparatus 10.
  • the setting information is an imaging parameter and a transfer parameter.
  • the imaging parameters are parameters such as exposure time, ISO (International Organization for Standardization) sensitivity, and image resolution.
  • the transfer parameter is a parameter such as identification information and resolution of image data to be transferred.
  • Image additional information is information added to image data.
  • the image additional information is position information, photographer information, and subject information.
  • the image additional information is transmitted from the communication device 20 to the imaging device 10.
  • the communication device 20 has a GPS (Global Positioning System) receiver
  • the position information is acquired by the GPS receiver.
  • Control information is information on the application layer in the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) reference model.
  • the control information is transmitted from the communication device 20 to the imaging device 10 by wireless communication in the data link layer and higher layers in the OSI reference model.
  • Any one of a plurality of operation modes is set in the imaging device 10.
  • the imaging device 10 performs an operation defined by the set operation mode.
  • the imaging device 10 can switch the operation mode set in the imaging device 10.
  • the plurality of operation modes may include a third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the plurality of operation modes may be only the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount may be used only in the first operation mode.
  • the first operation mode is a communication mode.
  • the communication mode includes at least one of a remote shooting mode, a parameter setting mode, an image transfer mode, and an image processing mode.
  • the remote imaging mode is a mode in which the image sensor 100 performs imaging based on control information transmitted from the communication device 20, that is, an imaging instruction.
  • the control unit 140 receives a live display start instruction from the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. After the live display start instruction is received, the control unit 140 instructs the image sensor 100 to start capturing a live image.
  • the image sensor 100 captures a live image.
  • the control unit 140 sequentially transmits a plurality of image data (live images) generated when the image sensor 100 continuously performs imaging to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a live image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10. After the live image is started to be captured by the image sensor 100, the control unit 140 receives a photographing instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the control unit 140 instructs the image sensor 100 to capture a still image or a moving image.
  • the image sensor 100 captures a still image or a moving image.
  • Image data generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging is stored in the memory 120.
  • the parameter setting mode is a mode in which setting information transmitted from the communication device 20 is set in the imaging device 10.
  • the image transfer mode is a mode for transmitting image data to the communication device 20.
  • the image processing mode is a mode in which at least one of image processing for image data and information addition processing for image data is performed.
  • the control unit 140 receives a parameter setting instruction and setting information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the parameter setting instruction and the setting information are received, the control unit 140 stores the setting information in the memory 120. In the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the control unit 140 controls the image sensor 100 and the like based on the setting information.
  • the control unit 140 receives an image transfer instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the image transfer instruction is received, the control unit 140 reads the image data from the memory 120 and transmits the read image data to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a still image or a moving image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 140 receives an image processing execution instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the image processing execution instruction is received, the control unit 140 reads image data from the memory 120 and executes image processing on the read image data. For example, the control unit 140 changes the image quality by performing filter processing on the image data. Alternatively, the control unit 140 processes the image by adding a stamp to the image data.
  • the imaging device 10 may include an image processing unit, and the image processing unit may execute image processing.
  • the control unit 140 receives an image processing execution instruction and image additional information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the image processing execution instruction is received, the control unit 140 reads image data from the memory 120 and adds image additional information to the read image data. The image data processed in the image processing mode may be transmitted to the communication device 20 in the image transfer mode.
  • the second operation mode is a stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the stand-alone imaging mode is a mode in which the image sensor 100 executes imaging based on an operation via the user interface 150.
  • the image data is generated in at least one of the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the control unit 140 instructs the image sensor 100 to capture a still image or a moving image.
  • the image sensor 100 captures a still image or a moving image.
  • Image data generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging is stored in the memory 120.
  • the communication device 130 does not perform wireless communication with the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 140 may turn off the communication device 130. That is, the control unit 140 may stop power supply from the battery 110 to the communication device 130.
  • the stand-alone shooting mode consumes less power by shooting compared to the remote shooting mode.
  • the imaging device 10 can acquire more image data than in the remote shooting mode.
  • the user interface 150 may accept a switching instruction indicating switching of the operation mode as a control command.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 based on the switching instruction received by the user interface 150.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode.
  • FIG. 3 shows an operation procedure of the imaging apparatus 10. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • step SA When the imaging apparatus 10 is powered off, the power button 152 accepts a power-on instruction to execute a startup process (step SA).
  • the imaging device 10 is activated by the activation process.
  • an operation mode management process is executed (step SB).
  • the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is controlled by the operation mode management process.
  • a command process is executed (step SC). Processing according to the control command is executed by command processing.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the use of the imaging device 10 is finished (step SD). A flag indicating whether or not the use of the imaging device 10 has been completed is stored in the memory 120. When the activation process is executed, the control unit 140 causes the memory 120 to store a flag having a value indicating that the imaging apparatus 10 is in use. When a power-off instruction is received by the communication device 130 or when the power button 152 receives a power-off instruction, the control unit 140 uses the value of the flag stored in the memory 120 and ends the use of the imaging device 10. Update to a value indicating that
  • step SD when the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has not ended, the processing in step SB is executed. If the use of the imaging device 10 has not ended, the processes in step SB and step SC are repeatedly executed.
  • step SD when the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended, an end process is executed (step SE). In the termination process, the control unit 140 turns off the power supply of the imaging device 10 by stopping the power supply from the battery 110. When the imaging device 10 is operating in the communication mode, in the end process, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to disconnect the communication connection with the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 disconnects the communication connection with the communication device 20.
  • FIG. 4 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA. With reference to FIG. 4, the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the activation process will be described.
  • step SA10 When the power button 152 receives a power-on instruction, power is supplied from the battery 110 to the control unit 140, whereby the control unit 140 starts operation.
  • the controller 140 reads the first remaining battery level B1 from the memory 120 (step SA10).
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines an operation mode when the imaging device 10 is activated based on the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SA11). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the communication mode.
  • Step SA11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the stand-alone shooting mode. Further, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 120 (step SA12).
  • step SA11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the communication mode. In addition, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication device 130 can communicate with the communication device 20. Also, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the communication mode in the memory 120 (step SA13). When the process in step SA12 or step SA13 is executed, the activation process ends.
  • the control unit 140 may receive an activation instruction indicating that the imaging device 10 is activated in a predetermined operation mode from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the predetermined operation mode is an operation mode designated by the user.
  • the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the activation instruction.
  • the memory 120 may store past mode information indicating the operation mode set in the previous use.
  • the control unit 140 may activate the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the past mode information.
  • the memory 120 may store schedule mode information indicating an operation mode scheduled to be used.
  • the control unit 140 may activate the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the schedule mode information.
  • the user interface 150 may accept an operation mode instruction from the user.
  • the control unit 140 may activate the imaging device 10 in an operation mode instructed by an operation via the user interface 150.
  • FIG. 5 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SB. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the operation mode management process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120 (step SB10).
  • step SB10 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the communication mode, the operation mode management process ends.
  • step SB10 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SB11).
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the first battery remaining amount B1. Thereby, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode (step SB12). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode.
  • step SB12 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the operation mode management process ends.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. Thereby, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the control unit 140 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. The updated setting mode information indicates the stand-alone shooting mode (step SB13).
  • step SB13 the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to disconnect the communication connection with the communication device 20.
  • the communication device 130 disconnects the communication connection with the communication device 20 (step SB14).
  • step SB14 the operation mode management process ends.
  • the imaging device 10 When the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched to the stand-alone shooting mode because the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the imaging device 10 operates in the stand-alone shooting mode if the entire remaining amount of the battery 110 is not zero. can do.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 performs imaging. Even when the remaining amount of the battery 110 is reduced due to communication, it is difficult for the imaging device 10 to perform imaging.
  • the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. For example, after step SB13, the control unit 140 updates the value of the flag stored in the memory 120 to a value indicating that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended. Thereafter, in step SD shown in FIG. 3, the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended, and the end process is executed in step SE.
  • the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 140 changes the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. You may switch. For example, when the control unit 140 determines in step SB12 that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 stores the scheduled mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 120. After the scheduled mode information is stored, the control unit 140 turns off the power of the imaging device 10 without switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. Thereafter, in the activation process, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the stand-alone imaging mode indicated by the schedule mode information.
  • the display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of switching of the operation mode. For example, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0 in step SB12, the control unit 140 transmits switching mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. . The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a message indicating that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched to the stand-alone shooting mode indicated by the switching mode information. After the switching mode information is transmitted, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the user may determine whether or not to allow the operation mode switch.
  • the communication device 20 has a user interface.
  • the user interface of the communication device 20 receives either one of a switch permission instruction for permitting switching of the operation mode and a switch prohibition instruction for prohibiting switching of the operation mode.
  • the communication device 20 transmits a control command indicating a switching permission instruction or a switching prohibition instruction to the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 140 receives the control command by the communication device 130.
  • the control command is a switching permission instruction
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the received control command is a switching prohibition instruction
  • the operation mode management process ends without switching the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10.
  • FIG. 6 shows a command processing procedure in step SC. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
  • Control unit 140 determines whether or not a control command has been accepted (step SC10). When the control command transmitted from the communication device 20 is received or when the control command is received by the user interface 150, the control unit 140 determines that the control command has been received. When the control command transmitted from the communication device 20 is not received and the control command is not accepted by the user interface 150, the control unit 140 determines that the control command is not accepted.
  • step SC10 when the control unit 140 determines that the control command is not accepted by the user interface 150, the command processing ends. In step SC10, when the control unit 140 determines that the control command has been accepted by the user interface 150, the control unit 140 executes processing according to the control command (step SC11).
  • the control unit 140 may receive a switching instruction indicating switching of the operation mode from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130 as a control command.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 based on the received switching instruction.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the imaging device 10 When the imaging device 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 does not communicate with the communication device 20. For this reason, when the imaging device 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 does not receive a switching instruction from the communication device 20.
  • control unit 140 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120 (step SC12).
  • step SC12 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the communication mode, the command processing ends.
  • step SC ⁇ b> 12 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B ⁇ b> 1 stored in the memory 120. Specifically, the control unit 140 reduces the first battery remaining amount B1 according to the usage amount of the battery 110 in the communication mode (step SC13). By executing the process in step SC13, the command process ends.
  • FIG. 7 shows a procedure of remaining amount update processing executed when the battery 110 is charged. The operation of the imaging device 10 in the remaining amount update process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the imaging device 10 When the imaging device 10 is off and a power cable connected to the power feeding device is connected to the imaging device 10, power feeding is performed from the power feeding device.
  • the battery 110 is charged by the power supply from the power supply apparatus.
  • the control unit 140 When the power supply from the power supply apparatus is started, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SF10). After step SF10, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity (step SF11).
  • step SF11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity, the process in step SF10 is executed.
  • step SF11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not equal to the first battery capacity, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120. . Specifically, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120 in accordance with the charge amount of the battery 110. That is, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF12).
  • step SF13 the control unit 140 determines whether power supply is stopped.
  • step SF13 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF10 is executed.
  • step SF13 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
  • the imaging mode control method in the first embodiment has a first step (step SB12) and a second step (step SB13).
  • the control unit 140 can continue the operation of the imaging device 10 in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Whether or not (first step).
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. (Second step).
  • the imaging mode control method of each aspect of the present invention may not include steps other than the first and second steps described above.
  • the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 when the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, there is a possibility that the remaining battery capacity necessary for the operation in the second operation mode is secured. Is expensive. For this reason, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates in the second operation mode is likely to increase. That is, a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication is less likely to occur.
  • the control unit 140 determines that the imaging apparatus 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode
  • the control unit 140 transmits the setting information to the communication device 130 via the communication device 130. 20 is received.
  • the setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device 10 when the imaging device 10 is operating in the second operation mode.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the first operation mode in the modification of the first embodiment is a parameter setting mode.
  • FIG. 8 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in the modification of the first embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 8 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • the memory 120 stores a predetermined value L1.
  • the predetermined value L1 indicates the minimum battery capacity required for operation in the parameter setting mode.
  • control unit 140 determines whether or not first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than predetermined value L1. That is, the control unit 140 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the first battery remaining amount B1. Thereby, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode (step SB20).
  • the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the communication mode.
  • the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode.
  • step SB20 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the operation mode management process ends.
  • step SB20 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 140 receives control information for parameter setting from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the control information received in step SB21 includes a parameter setting instruction and setting information.
  • the setting information received in step SB21 is a parameter in the second operation mode.
  • the setting information is an imaging parameter in the stand-alone imaging mode.
  • control unit 140 stores the setting information included in the control information in the memory 120. Thereby, the control part 140 changes the setting of the imaging device 10 (step SB22).
  • step SB22 the process at step SB13 is performed. The order of processing in step SB22 and step SB13 may be switched. Further, the process in step SB22 may be executed after the process in step SB14 is executed.
  • control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode
  • the control unit 140 receives the setting information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130 (Step S1). SB21). After the setting information is received, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode (step SB22).
  • the display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of a setting change of the imaging device 10. For example, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1 in step SB20, the control unit 140 transmits setting change information indicating a setting change of the imaging device 10 to the communication device 130. Transmit to the communication device 20. The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a message indicating acceptance of the setting information based on the setting change information.
  • the communication device 20 has a user interface.
  • the user interface of the communication device 20 receives a change in setting information.
  • the communication device 20 transmits control information including the parameter setting instruction and the changed setting information to the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 140 receives the control information by the communication device 130.
  • the display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of the switching of the operation mode by the same operation as described above. After the user is notified of the switching of the operation mode, the user may determine whether to permit the switching of the operation mode.
  • the imaging device 10 receives the setting information when the first battery remaining amount is reduced by the operation in the first operation mode. After the setting information is received, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. For this reason, before the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed, the imaging device 10 can receive the setting information used for the second operation mode and perform setting based on the setting information.
  • the memory 120 stores a second battery remaining amount that is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110 in addition to the first battery remaining amount.
  • the second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the second operation mode.
  • the memory 120 stores the second battery capacity.
  • the second battery capacity is a battery capacity assigned to the second operation mode.
  • the second battery capacity is larger than 0 and smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110.
  • the sum of the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity is less than or equal to the total capacity of the battery 110.
  • the battery capacity decreases due to the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the second operation mode.
  • the second battery remaining capacity is a remaining capacity obtained by subtracting the capacity reduced by the operation in the second operation mode from the second battery capacity.
  • the second battery remaining amount may be represented by the total capacity of the battery 110 or a ratio (%) to the second battery capacity.
  • the battery 110 need not be physically divided into two batteries.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the second operation mode based on the second remaining battery level. To do. When the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the second operation mode, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the second operation mode to the first operation mode.
  • the plurality of operation modes that can be set in the imaging apparatus 10 may include a third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the plurality of operation modes may be only the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the first battery remaining amount may be used only in the first operation mode, and the second battery remaining amount may be used only in the second operation mode.
  • the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. That is, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount so that the first battery remaining amount is larger than the second battery remaining amount on average.
  • the imaging device 10 of the second embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 9 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA.
  • the process shown in FIG. 9 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • Step SA11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 140 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (Step SA20).
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the second battery remaining amount B2 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines an operation mode when the imaging device 10 is activated based on the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SA21). When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the stand-alone shooting mode. When the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • step SA21 when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the process in step SA13 is executed.
  • the control unit 140 when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in an arbitrary operation mode.
  • the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication device 130 can communicate with the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the operation mode at the time of activation in the memory 120 (step SA22). When the process in any one of step SA12, step SA13, and step SA22 is executed, the activation process ends.
  • FIG. 10 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SB. The process shown in FIG. 10 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SB10 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is stand-alone shooting based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. It is determined whether or not the mode is selected (step SB30).
  • step SB30 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the stand-alone shooting mode, the operation mode management process ends.
  • step SB30 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 140 reads the second remaining battery charge B2 from the memory 120 (step SB31).
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the second battery remaining amount B2 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode based on the second battery remaining amount B2. Thereby, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the stand-alone shooting mode (step SB32). When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the stand-alone shooting mode. When the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • step SB32 when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the operation mode management process ends.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode. Thereby, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed to the communication mode.
  • the control unit 140 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. The updated setting mode information indicates the communication mode.
  • the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication apparatus 130 can communicate with the communication apparatus 20 (step SB33).
  • the operation mode management process ends.
  • the imaging device 10 can operate in the communication mode.
  • the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging apparatus 10. For example, after step SB33, the control unit 140 updates the value of the flag stored in the memory 120 to a value indicating that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended. Thereafter, in step SD shown in FIG. 3, the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended, and the end process is executed in step SE.
  • the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 140 changes the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the second operation mode to the first operation mode. You may switch. For example, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0 in step SB32, the control unit 140 stores the scheduled mode information indicating the communication mode in the memory 120. After the scheduled mode information is stored, the control unit 140 turns off the power of the imaging device 10 without switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. Thereafter, in the activation process, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the communication mode indicated by the schedule mode information.
  • the display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of switching of the operation mode. For example, when the control unit 140 determines in step SB32 that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the control unit 140 transmits the switching mode information indicating the communication mode to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a message indicating that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched to the communication mode indicated by the switching mode information. After the switching mode information is transmitted, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode.
  • the user may determine whether or not to allow the operation mode switch.
  • the communication device 20 has a user interface.
  • the user interface of the communication device 20 receives either one of a switch permission instruction for permitting switching of the operation mode and a switch prohibition instruction for prohibiting switching of the operation mode.
  • the communication device 20 transmits a control command indicating a switching permission instruction or a switching prohibition instruction to the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 140 receives the control command by the communication device 130.
  • the control command is a switching permission instruction
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode.
  • the received control command is a switching prohibition instruction
  • the operation mode management process ends without switching the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10.
  • FIG. 11 shows a command processing procedure in step SC. The process shown in FIG. 11 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SC12 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is stand-alone imaging based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. It is determined whether or not the mode is selected (step SC20).
  • step SC20 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the stand-alone shooting mode, the command processing ends.
  • step SC ⁇ b> 20 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B ⁇ b> 2 stored in the memory 120. Specifically, the control unit 140 reduces the second battery remaining amount B2 according to the usage amount of the battery 110 in the stand-alone shooting mode (step SC21). By executing the processing in step SC21, the command processing ends.
  • FIG. 12 shows the procedure of the remaining amount update process executed when the battery 110 is charged. The process shown in FIG. 12 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SF11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity, the control unit 140 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (step SF20). After step SF20, control unit 140 determines whether or not second battery remaining amount B2 is equal to the second battery capacity (step SF21).
  • step SF21 when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is equal to the second battery capacity, the process in step SF23 is executed.
  • step SF21 when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not equal to the second battery capacity, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120. . Specifically, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B ⁇ b> 2 stored in the memory 120 according to the charge amount of the battery 110. That is, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF22).
  • step SF23 the control unit 140 determines whether power feeding is stopped.
  • step SF23 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF20 is executed.
  • step SF23 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
  • the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the first battery capacity and the second battery remaining amount B2 is smaller than the second battery capacity.
  • the first battery remaining amount B1 is updated by the process shown in FIG. 11 until the first battery remaining amount B1 becomes equal to the first battery capacity.
  • the second battery remaining amount B2 is not updated until the first battery remaining amount B1 becomes equal to the first battery capacity.
  • the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in preference to the second battery remaining amount B2 as the remaining amount of the battery 110 increases.
  • the remaining battery level is managed in each of the first and second operation modes. Even when the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first or second operation mode, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates is likely to increase by switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. That is, a state in which processing in another operation mode cannot be performed is less likely to occur due to a decrease in the remaining battery level in the operation mode set in the imaging apparatus 10.
  • the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
  • FIG. 13 shows a procedure of remaining amount update processing in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the process shown in FIG. 13 is different from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SF11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not equal to the first battery capacity, the control unit 140 stores the memory based on the change in the remaining battery amount during the first predetermined time.
  • the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in 120 is updated. For example, when the total remaining amount of the battery 110 increases by ⁇ V from the timing when the processing in step SF11 is performed until the first predetermined time elapses, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 by ⁇ V. (Step SF30). After step SF30, the process in step SF13 is executed.
  • step SF11 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity, the process in step SF13 is executed.
  • step SF13 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF20 is executed.
  • step SF13 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
  • step SF21 when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not equal to the second battery capacity, the control unit 140 stores the memory based on the change in the remaining battery amount during the second predetermined time.
  • the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in 120 is updated. For example, when the total remaining amount of the battery 110 increases by ⁇ V from the timing when the process in step SF21 is executed until the second predetermined time has elapsed, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 by ⁇ V. (Step SF31). After step SF31, the process in step SF23 is executed.
  • step SF23 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF10 is executed. In step SF23, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
  • the second predetermined time is the same as the first predetermined time.
  • the second predetermined time is different from the first predetermined time.
  • the second predetermined time is shorter than the first predetermined time.
  • the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 alternately. Thereby, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount.
  • the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
  • FIG. 14 shows the configuration of the communication device 20 in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the communication device 20 includes a memory 200, a communication device 210 (first communication device), a control unit 220 (first control unit), a user interface 230, and a display 240.
  • the memory 200 is a volatile or non-volatile memory.
  • the memory 200 is at least one of RAM, DRAM, SRAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, and flash memory.
  • the memory 200 stores image data received by the communication device 210.
  • the communication device 210 is a wireless module and performs wireless communication with the imaging device 10 via an antenna not shown in FIG.
  • the imaging device 10 and the communication device 20 may be connected by a cable, and the communication device 210 may communicate with the imaging device 10 via the cable.
  • the control unit 220 is a controller.
  • the control unit 220 includes at least one of a processor and a logic circuit.
  • the controller 220 can include one or more processors.
  • the controller 220 can include one or more logic circuits.
  • the control unit 220 executes control based on the state of the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 220 may read a program including an instruction that defines the operation of the control unit 220 and may execute the read program. That is, the function of the control unit 220 may be realized by software.
  • the implementation form of this program is the same as the implementation form of the program that implements the functions of the control unit 140 shown in FIG.
  • the control unit 220 transmits information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Specifically, the control unit 220 controls the communication device 210 so that information is transmitted to the imaging device 10. That is, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to transmit information regarding the imaging device 10. Thereby, the communication device 210 transmits information to the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 220 receives image data or information from the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Specifically, the control unit 220 controls the communication device 210 so that image data or information is received from the imaging device 10. That is, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to receive the image data or information transmitted from the imaging device 10. Accordingly, the communication device 210 receives image data or information from the imaging device 10.
  • the user interface 230 is an operation unit and receives an instruction corresponding to the control command from the user.
  • the user interface 230 is at least one of a button, a switch, a key, and a touch panel.
  • the user interface 230 receives control command and setting information instructions from the user.
  • the display 240 is a display unit and displays image data stored in the memory 200.
  • the display 240 is at least one of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display.
  • the display 240 may be a touch panel display. In that case, the user interface 230 and the display 240 are integrated.
  • the battery included in the communication device 20 is not shown in FIG.
  • the control unit 140 transmits the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount stored in the memory 120 to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130.
  • the control unit 220 receives the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 causes the display 240 to display the received first battery remaining amount and second battery remaining amount.
  • the display 240 displays the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the user may switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 based on the displayed first battery remaining amount and second battery remaining amount. For example, when the imaging device 10 is operating in an operation mode in which the remaining battery level is lower among the communication mode and the stand-alone shooting mode, the user may switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10.
  • the user inputs an operation mode switching instruction via the user interface 150.
  • the user interface 150 receives a switching instruction from the user.
  • the control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 140 receives a switching instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 based on the received switching instruction.
  • FIG. 15 and 16 show a screen 241 of the display 240.
  • FIG. FIG. 15 shows a battery remaining amount display screen.
  • the mark M ⁇ b> 10 and the mark M ⁇ b> 11 are displayed on the screen 241.
  • a mark M10 indicates the first remaining battery level.
  • the shape of the mark M10 changes according to the first remaining battery level.
  • the mark M11 indicates the second remaining battery level.
  • the shape of the mark M11 changes according to the second battery remaining amount.
  • FIG. 16 shows a battery capacity setting screen. As shown in FIG. 16, the ratio R10 of the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity is 3: 1.
  • the user designates the ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity via the user interface 150.
  • the user interface 150 accepts a ratio specified by the user.
  • the control unit 220 generates control information including a battery capacity setting instruction and setting information indicating a ratio designated by the user.
  • the control unit 220 transmits control information to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 140 receives control information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the controller 140 sets the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity in the memory 120 based on the ratio indicated by the received control information.
  • the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount are displayed on the display 240. Thereby, the user can confirm the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. The user can switch the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 according to the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the user interface 150 receives a ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity.
  • the control unit 220 transmits control information indicating the ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Thereby, the user can set the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity in the imaging apparatus 10.
  • the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 140 counts the number of image data generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the counted number of image data.
  • the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount.
  • the memory 120 stores the number of untransferred images.
  • the number of untransferred images is the number of image data that is generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging and is not transferred to the communication device 20.
  • the number of untransferred images is an integer of 0 or more.
  • image data is generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging, the number of untransferred images increases by one.
  • the image data stored in the memory 120 is transferred to the communication device 20, the number of untransferred images is reduced by one.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of untransferred images.
  • the first operation mode in the third embodiment is an image transfer mode.
  • FIG. 17 shows an operation procedure of the imaging apparatus 10. The processing shown in FIG. 17 will be described while referring to differences from the processing shown in FIG.
  • step SC power management processing is executed (step SG).
  • the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount are adjusted by the power management process.
  • step SD the process in step SD is executed.
  • FIG. 18 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • control unit 140 reads the untransferred image count Ct from the memory 120 (step SG40). After step SG40, control unit 140 reads first battery remaining amount B1 from memory 120 (step SG41). The order of processing in step SG40 and step SG41 may be switched.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCt necessary for the communication device 130 to transfer Ct images.
  • the battery capacity B necessary for the communication device 130 to transfer one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCt by multiplying the battery capacity B by the number of untransferred images Ct (step SG42).
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the battery capacity BCt is larger than the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SG43). When the battery capacity BCt is larger than the first battery remaining amount B1, the first battery remaining amount B1 is not sufficient for transferring Ct images. When the battery capacity BCt is equal to or less than the first battery remaining amount B1, the first battery remaining amount B1 is sufficient for transferring Ct images.
  • step SG43 when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCt is equal to or less than the first battery remaining amount B1, the power management process ends.
  • step SG43 when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCt is larger than the first battery remaining amount B1, the control unit 140 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (step SG44).
  • the control unit 140 calculates a value (BCt ⁇ B1) obtained by subtracting the first battery remaining amount B1 from the battery capacity BCt.
  • the value (BCt ⁇ B1) is a battery capacity that is insufficient for transferring Ct images.
  • the controller 140 determines whether or not the value (BCt ⁇ B1) is smaller than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SG45). When the value (BCt ⁇ B1) is smaller than the second battery remaining amount B2, the battery capacity that is insufficient for transferring Ct images can be compensated by the second battery remaining amount B2. When the value (BCt ⁇ B1) is equal to or greater than the second battery remaining amount B2, the battery capacity that is insufficient for transferring Ct images cannot be compensated by the second battery remaining amount B2.
  • step SG45 when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCt ⁇ B1) is equal to or greater than the second battery remaining amount B2, the power management process ends.
  • Step SG45 when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCt ⁇ B1) is smaller than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 sets the second battery remaining amount B2 to the value (BCt ⁇ B1). cut back. Further, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 by adding the value (BCt ⁇ B1) to the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120 (step SG46). By executing the process in step SG46, the power management process ends.
  • the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 based on the number of image data (the number of untransferred images Ct) generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. It is determined whether or not (step SG43). When the control unit 140 determines to increase the first battery remaining amount B1, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SG46).
  • the process shown in FIG. 18 may be executed only when the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the image transfer mode.
  • the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can ensure the first remaining battery level necessary for image transfer.
  • the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. When the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount.
  • the memory 120 stores the scheduled number of shots.
  • the scheduled number of images is the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging.
  • the planned number of shots is an integer of 1 or more.
  • the scheduled number of images is reduced by one.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the scheduled number of shots.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 19 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The operation of the imaging device 10 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • control unit 140 reads the scheduled number of images Cs from the memory 120 (step SG50). After step SG50, control unit 140 reads second battery remaining amount B2 from memory 120 (step SG51). The order of processing in step SG50 and step SG51 may be switched.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCs necessary for the image sensor 100 to capture Cs images.
  • the battery capacity B necessary for the image sensor 100 to capture one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCs by multiplying the battery capacity B by the scheduled number of shots Cs (step SG52).
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the battery capacity BCs is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SG53). When the battery capacity BCs is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the second battery remaining amount B2 is not sufficient for capturing Cs images. When the battery capacity BCs is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the second battery remaining amount B2 is sufficient for capturing Cs images.
  • step SG53 when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCs is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the power management process ends.
  • step SG53 when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCs is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SG54).
  • the control unit 140 calculates a value (BCs ⁇ B2) obtained by subtracting the second battery remaining amount B2 from the battery capacity BCs.
  • the value (BCs ⁇ B2) is a battery capacity that is insufficient to capture Cs images.
  • the controller 140 determines whether or not the value (BCs ⁇ B2) is smaller than the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SG55). When the value (BCs ⁇ B2) is smaller than the first battery remaining amount B1, the battery capacity that is insufficient to capture Cs images can be compensated by the first battery remaining amount B1. When the value (BCs ⁇ B2) is equal to or greater than the first battery remaining amount B1, the battery capacity that is insufficient to capture Cs images cannot be compensated by the first battery remaining amount B1.
  • step SG55 when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCs ⁇ B2) is equal to or greater than the first battery remaining amount B1, the power management process ends.
  • step SG55 when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCs ⁇ B2) is smaller than the first battery remaining amount B1, the control unit 140 sets the first battery remaining amount B1 by the value (BCs ⁇ B2). cut back. Further, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B2 by adding the value (BCs ⁇ B2) to the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120 (step SG56). By executing the process in step SG56, the power management process ends.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the second battery remaining amount B ⁇ b> 2 based on the number of image data (scheduled shooting number Cs) that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging. It is determined whether or not to increase (step SG53). When the control unit 140 determines to increase the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SG56).
  • the process illustrated in FIG. 19 may be executed only when the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount.
  • the imaging device 10 can secure the second battery remaining amount necessary for capturing an image.
  • the imaging device 10 can acquire more image data than in the remote shooting mode. For this reason, the imaging device 10 can acquire the image data of the scheduled number of images more reliably.
  • the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. While the battery 110 is being charged, the control unit 140 changes the remaining battery level determined to increase preferentially among the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount according to the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. Increase over the remaining battery power.
  • FIG. 20 shows the procedure of the remaining amount update process executed when the battery 110 is charged. The operation of the imaging device 10 in the remaining amount update process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • control unit 140 When the power supply from the power supply apparatus is started, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SF40). After step SF40, control unit 140 reads second battery remaining amount B2 from memory 120 (step SF41). The order of processing in step SF40 and step SF41 may be switched. After step SF41, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SF42).
  • Step SF42 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 uses the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120. Update. Specifically, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF43).
  • step SF42 when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 uses the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120. Update. Specifically, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF44).
  • step SF45 the control unit 140 determines whether power feeding is stopped.
  • step SF45 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF40 is executed.
  • step SF45 when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply has been stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
  • the control unit 140 prioritizes increasing the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Is determined (step SF42).
  • the controller 140 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (steps SF43 and SF44). .
  • the control unit 140 determines a battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. As a result, priority is given to a smaller battery remaining amount of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the memory 120 stores a first battery remaining amount, a second battery remaining amount, a first battery capacity, and a second battery capacity. Based on the first ratio and the second ratio, the control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased.
  • the first ratio is a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity.
  • the second ratio is a ratio of the second remaining battery capacity to the second battery capacity.
  • FIG. 21 shows the remaining amount update process executed when the battery 110 is charged. The process shown in FIG. 21 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SF41 the control unit 140 calculates a first ratio P1 of the first battery remaining amount B1 with respect to the first battery capacity (step SF50).
  • step SF50 the control unit 140 calculates a second ratio P2 of the second battery remaining amount B2 with respect to the second battery capacity (step SF51).
  • step SF51 the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first ratio P1 is greater than the second ratio P2 (step SF52).
  • step SF52 when the control unit 140 determines that the first ratio P1 is larger than the second ratio P2, the process in step SF43 is executed. In step SF52, when the control unit 140 determines that the first ratio P1 is equal to or less than the second ratio P2, the process in step SF44 is executed.
  • the control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio P1 and the second ratio P2. (Step SF52).
  • the controller 140 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (steps SF43 and SF44). .
  • the control unit 140 determines the battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio. As a result, priority is given to a battery remaining amount having a smaller ratio to the battery capacity allocated to each operation mode out of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Furthermore, the memory 120 stores a first number of image data that is to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging.
  • the control unit 140 counts the second number of image data generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging.
  • the control unit 140 calculates a first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number is transmitted to the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 140 calculates a second estimated value of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number. Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be prioritized and increased.
  • the first operation mode in the second modification of the fifth embodiment is an image transfer mode.
  • FIG. 22 shows a procedure of remaining amount update processing executed when the battery 110 is charged. The process shown in FIG. 22 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SF41 the control unit 140 reads the scheduled number of shots Cs from the memory 120 (step SF60). After step SF60, the control unit 140 reads the number of untransferred images Ct from the memory 120 (step SF61). The order of processing in step SF60 and step SF61 may be switched.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the second estimated remaining amount B2 'after the second battery remaining amount B2 is reduced by the image sensor 100 taking Cs images.
  • the battery capacity B necessary for taking one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCs by multiplying the battery capacity B by the scheduled number of images Cs. Further, the control unit 140 calculates the second estimated remaining amount B2 'by subtracting the battery capacity BCs from the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SF62).
  • the control unit 140 calculates the first estimated remaining amount B1 'after the first battery remaining amount B1 is reduced by the communication device 130 transferring Ct images.
  • the battery capacity B necessary for transferring one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120.
  • the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCt by multiplying the battery capacity B by the number Ct of untransferred images. Furthermore, the control unit 140 calculates the first estimated remaining amount B1 'by subtracting the battery capacity BCt from the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SF63).
  • step SF62 and step SF63 may be switched.
  • the processes in step SF60 and step SF62 may be executed before the process in step SF61 is executed.
  • the processes in step SF61 and step SF63 may be performed before the process in step SF60 is performed.
  • step SF64 the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is larger than the second estimated remaining amount B2' (step SF64).
  • step SF64 when the control unit 140 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is larger than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SF43 is executed.
  • step SF64 when the control unit 140 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is equal to or less than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SF44 is executed.
  • the control unit 140 includes a first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number (the number Ct of untransferred images) is transmitted to the communication device 20.
  • First estimated remaining amount B1 ′ is calculated (step SF63).
  • the control unit 140 uses the second estimated value (second estimated remaining amount B2 ′) of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number (scheduled number of shots Cs). ) Is calculated (step SF62).
  • control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased (step SF64).
  • the controller 140 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (steps SF43 and SF44). .
  • the memory 120 may store a first time when the imaging apparatus 10 operates in the previous first operation mode and a second time when the imaging apparatus 10 operates in the previous second operation mode.
  • the controller 140 may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first time and the second time. For example, when the first time is longer than the second time, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. In addition, when the first time is equal to or shorter than the second time, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110.
  • the control unit 140 determines a battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first estimated remaining amount B1 'and the second estimated remaining amount B2'. As a result, of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount, priority is given to the remaining battery remaining amount after the scheduled operation is performed. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • FIG. 2 A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG.
  • the configuration of the imaging device 10 is shown in FIG. 2, and the configuration of the communication device 20 is shown in FIG.
  • the imaging device 10 executes determination regarding switching of the operation mode.
  • the communication device 20 performs the determination.
  • the memory 200 stores the first remaining battery level.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. To do.
  • control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode
  • the control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the memory 200 stores the operation mode set in the imaging device 10 in addition to the first remaining battery level.
  • the control unit 220 transmits a live display start instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the imaging device 10 captures a live image.
  • the control unit 220 sequentially receives a plurality of image data (live images) generated by the image sensor 100 continuously performing imaging from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the display 240 displays a live image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10.
  • the user confirms the composition based on the live image and inputs a shooting instruction via the user interface 230.
  • the user interface 230 receives a shooting instruction from the user.
  • the control unit 220 transmits a shooting instruction to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the user inputs a parameter setting instruction and setting information via the user interface 230.
  • the user interface 230 receives a parameter setting instruction and setting information from the user.
  • the control unit 220 transmits a parameter setting instruction and setting information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the user inputs an image transfer instruction via the user interface 230.
  • the user interface 230 receives an image transfer instruction from the user.
  • the control unit 220 transmits an image transfer instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. After the image transfer instruction is transmitted, image data is transmitted from the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 220 receives image data from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 stores the image data in the memory 200.
  • the display 240 displays a still image or a moving image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10.
  • the user inputs an image processing execution instruction via the user interface 230.
  • the user interface 230 receives an image processing execution instruction from the user.
  • the control unit 220 transmits an image processing execution instruction to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 transmits an image processing execution instruction and image additional information to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • FIG. 23 shows an operation procedure of the imaging apparatus 10. The process shown in FIG. 23 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SB The operation mode management process (step SB) in the process shown in FIG. 3 is not executed. After step SA, the process in step SC is executed.
  • FIG. 24 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA. With reference to FIG. 24, the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the activation process will be described.
  • the control unit 140 When the power button 152 receives a power-on instruction, power is supplied from the battery 110 to the control unit 140, whereby the control unit 140 starts operation.
  • the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication device 130 can communicate with the communication device 20 (step SA30).
  • step SA30 the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SA31). After step SA31, the control unit 140 transmits first remaining amount information indicating the first remaining battery amount B1 to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130 (step SA32).
  • control unit 140 receives the activation mode information for setting the operation mode from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130 (step SA33).
  • the activation mode information received from the communication device 20 indicates an operation mode when the imaging device 10 is activated.
  • step SA33 the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the activation mode information received from the communication device 20. At this time, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the operation mode in the memory 120.
  • the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to disconnect the communication connection with the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 disconnects the communication connection with the communication device 20 (step SA34).
  • step SA34 the process in step SA34 is executed, the activation process is terminated.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 may determine the operation mode at the time of activation by a process similar to the activation process illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 25 shows the procedure of command processing in step SC. The process shown in FIG. 25 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • control unit 140 After step SC13, control unit 140 reads first battery remaining amount B1 from memory 120 (step SC30). After step SC30, control unit 140 transmits first remaining amount information indicating first battery remaining amount B1 to communication device 20 by communication device 130. Thereby, the control part 140 notifies the communication apparatus 20 of the updated 1st battery remaining charge B1 (step SC31). By executing the process in step SC31, the command process ends.
  • FIG. 26 shows an operation procedure of the communication device 20. The operation of the communication device 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • step SH When the power of the communication device 20 is off, the user interface 230 receives a power-on instruction to execute a start process (step SH).
  • the communication device 20 is activated by the activation process.
  • an operation mode management process is executed (step SI).
  • the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is controlled by the operation mode management process.
  • a command process is executed (step SJ). Processing according to the control command is executed by command processing.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not the use of the communication device 20 is finished (step SK). A flag indicating whether or not the use of the communication device 20 has been completed is stored in the memory 200. When the activation process is executed, the control unit 220 causes the memory 200 to store a flag having a value indicating that the communication device 20 is in use. When the user interface 230 receives a power-off instruction, the control unit 220 updates the value of the flag stored in the memory 200 to a value indicating that the use of the communication device 20 has ended.
  • step SK when the control unit 220 determines that the use of the communication device 20 has not ended, the processing in step SI is executed. If the use of the communication device 20 has not ended, the processes in step SI and step SJ are repeatedly executed.
  • step SK when the control unit 220 determines that the use of the communication device 20 has ended, an end process is executed (step SL). In the termination process, the control unit 220 turns off the power supply of the communication device 20 by stopping the power supply from the battery of the communication device 20. When the imaging device 10 is operating in the communication mode, in the end process, the control unit 220 transmits a power-off instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. Thereafter, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to disconnect the communication connection with the imaging device 10. As a result, the communication device 210 disconnects the communication connection with the imaging device 10.
  • FIG. 27 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SH. With reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the communication device 20 in the activation process will be described.
  • the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to establish a communication connection with the imaging device 10. Thereby, the communication device 210 can communicate with the imaging device 10 (step SH10).
  • step SH10 the control unit 220 receives the first remaining amount information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SH11). After step SH11, the control unit 220 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 based on the first remaining amount information. As a result, the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 becomes the same as the first battery remaining amount B1 indicated by the first remaining amount information (step SH12).
  • control unit 220 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 200 (step SH13). After step SH13, control unit 220 determines whether or not first battery remaining amount B1 is zero. That is, the control unit 220 determines an operation mode when the imaging apparatus 10 is activated based on the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SH14). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the communication mode.
  • step SH14 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 220 stores setting mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 200 (step SH15). After step SH15, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating activation in the stand-alone imaging mode to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SH16). The imaging apparatus 10 that has received the activation mode information is activated in the stand-alone imaging mode in step SA34 in FIG.
  • control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to disconnect the communication connection with the imaging device 10. Accordingly, the communication device 210 disconnects the communication connection with the imaging device 10 (step SH17).
  • step SH14 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 220 stores setting mode information indicating the communication mode in the memory 200 (step SH18). After step SH18, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating activation in the communication mode to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210 (step SH19). The imaging apparatus 10 that has received the activation mode information is activated in the communication mode in step SA34 in FIG. When the process in step SH17 or step SH19 is executed, the activation process ends.
  • control unit 220 may transmit control information indicating activation in the operation mode indicated by the past mode information to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the past mode information indicates the operation mode set in the previous use.
  • control unit 220 may transmit control information indicating activation in the operation mode indicated by the schedule mode information to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the scheduled mode information indicates an operation mode that is scheduled to be used.
  • FIG. 28 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SI. The operation of the communication device 20 in the operation mode management process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the processing in each of steps SI10 to SI12 is the same as the processing in each of steps SB10 to SB12 shown in FIG.
  • the processing subject in each of steps SI10 to SI12 is control unit 220.
  • step SI12 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 220 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 200.
  • the updated setting mode information indicates the stand-alone shooting mode (step SI13).
  • control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
  • This switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode (step SI14).
  • step SI14 the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to disconnect the communication connection with the imaging device 10. As a result, the communication device 210 disconnects the communication connection with the imaging device 10 (step SI15).
  • step SI15 the operation mode management process ends.
  • the control unit 220 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. For example, after step SI ⁇ b> 14, the control unit 220 transmits a power-off instruction to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 220 changes the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. You may switch. For example, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0 in step SI12, the control unit 220 transmits a power-off instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. Thereafter, when the imaging apparatus 10 is activated, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating that the imaging apparatus 10 is activated in the stand-alone imaging mode to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. When the power-off instruction is transmitted, the control unit 220 may transmit an instruction to store the schedule mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 120 to the imaging apparatus 10 through the communication device 210.
  • the display 240 may notify the user of switching of the operation mode. For example, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0 in step SI12, the control unit 220 displays a message indicating that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched to the stand-alone shooting mode on the display 240. To display. After the message is displayed, the control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the user may determine whether or not to allow the operation mode switch. For example, the user interface 230 receives any one of a switch permission instruction for permitting switching of the operation mode and a switch prohibition instruction for prohibiting switching of the operation mode.
  • the control unit 220 transmits the switching instruction to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the switching prohibition instruction is received by the user interface 230, the operation mode management process ends without switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10.
  • FIG. 29 shows the command processing procedure in step SJ. The operation of the communication device 20 in command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not a control command has been accepted (step SJ10). When the control command is received by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 determines that the control command has been received. When the control command is not accepted by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 determines that the control command is not accepted.
  • step SJ10 when the control unit 220 determines that the control command is not accepted by the user interface 230, the command processing ends.
  • step SJ10 when the control unit 220 determines that the control command has been received by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 transmits the control command to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SJ11).
  • control unit 220 receives the first remaining amount information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210. After step SJ11, control unit 220 determines whether or not the first remaining amount information has been received (step SJ12).
  • step SJ12 when the control unit 220 determines that the first remaining amount information has not been received, the command processing ends.
  • step SJ12 when the control unit 220 determines that the first remaining amount information is received, the control unit 220 determines the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 based on the first remaining amount information. Update. As a result, the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 becomes the same as the first battery remaining amount B1 indicated by the first remaining amount information (step SJ13). By executing the process in step SJ13, the command process ends.
  • the imaging mode control method in the sixth embodiment has a first step (step SI12) and a second step (step SI14).
  • the control unit 220 can continue the operation of the imaging device 10 in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Whether or not (first step).
  • the control unit 220 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. A switching instruction indicating this is transmitted to the imaging apparatus 10 by the communication device 210 (second step).
  • the imaging mode control method of each aspect of the present invention may not include steps other than the first and second steps described above.
  • the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 when the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, there is a possibility that the remaining battery capacity necessary for the operation in the second operation mode is secured. Is expensive. For this reason, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates in the second operation mode is likely to increase. That is, a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication is less likely to occur.
  • the control unit 220 determines that the imaging apparatus 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode
  • the control unit 220 displays the setting information and the switching instruction as the communication device 210.
  • the setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device 10 when the imaging device 10 is operating in the second operation mode.
  • the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
  • the first operation mode in the modification of the sixth embodiment is a parameter setting mode.
  • FIG. 30 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in the modification of the sixth embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 30 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • the memory 200 stores a predetermined value L1.
  • the predetermined value L1 indicates the minimum battery capacity required for operation in the parameter setting mode.
  • control unit 220 determines whether or not first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than predetermined value L1. That is, the control unit 220 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the first battery remaining amount B1. Thereby, control part 220 judges whether imaging device 10 can continue operation in communication mode (Step SI20). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode.
  • step SI20 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the operation mode management process ends. In step SI20, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the process in step SI13 is executed.
  • control unit 220 transmits control information for parameter setting to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SI21).
  • the control information transmitted in step SI21 includes a parameter setting instruction and setting information.
  • the setting information transmitted in step SI21 is a parameter in the second operation mode.
  • the setting information is an imaging parameter in the stand-alone imaging mode.
  • the parameter setting instruction, setting information, and switching instruction may be transmitted simultaneously.
  • control information indicating that the process related to the parameter setting instruction is executed before the process related to the switching instruction may be transmitted.
  • control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 220 transmits setting information and a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. (Step SI21 and Step SI14).
  • the display 240 may notify the user of a setting change of the imaging device 10. For example, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1 in step SI20, the control unit 220 displays a message indicating acceptance of the setting information on the display 240.
  • the user interface 230 receives a change in setting information.
  • the control unit 220 transmits control information including the parameter setting instruction and the changed setting information to the imaging device 10.
  • the user may be notified of the switching of the operation mode by the same operation as described above. After the user is notified of the switching of the operation mode, the user may determine whether to permit the switching of the operation mode.
  • the imaging device 10 receives the setting information when the first battery remaining amount is reduced by the operation in the first operation mode. After the setting information is received, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. For this reason, before the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed, the imaging device 10 can receive the setting information used for the second operation mode and perform setting based on the setting information.
  • the communication device 20 controls switching from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. Further, the imaging apparatus 10 controls switching from the second operation mode to the first operation mode.
  • the memory 120 stores a first battery remaining amount, a second battery remaining amount, a first battery capacity, and a second battery capacity.
  • the memory 200 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 according to the seventh embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 31 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA.
  • the process shown in FIG. 31 is different from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SA30 the controller 220 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (step SA40). After step SA40, control unit 140 transmits the first remaining amount information and the second remaining amount information to communication device 20 through communication device 130 (step SA41). The first remaining amount information indicates the first remaining battery amount B1. The second remaining amount information indicates the second remaining battery amount B2. After step SA41, the process at step SA33 is executed.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 may determine the operation mode at the time of activation by a process similar to the activation process illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 32 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SB. The process shown in FIG. 32 is different from the process shown in FIG.
  • control unit 140 transmits the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information to communication device 20.
  • the mode switching information indicates that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has been switched from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode (step SB40).
  • the imaging device 10 When the imaging device 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 does not perform wireless communication with the communication device 20.
  • the imaging device 10 When the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode, the imaging device 10 notifies the communication device 20 of the second battery remaining amount B2.
  • the operation mode management process ends.
  • FIG. 33 shows the procedure of command processing in step SC. The process shown in FIG. 33 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • the user interface 150 can receive a switching instruction indicating that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode from the user.
  • the control unit 140 transmits the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130.
  • the imaging device 10 notifies the communication device 20 of the second remaining battery level B2.
  • the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the switching instruction.
  • step SC20 and step SC21 shown in FIG. 11 are added to the processing shown in FIG.
  • the communication device 20 of the seventh embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 34 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SH.
  • the process shown in FIG. 34 is different from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SH14 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 220 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 200 (step SH20).
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not the second battery remaining amount B2 is zero. That is, the control unit 220 determines an operation mode when the imaging apparatus 10 is activated based on the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SH21). When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the stand-alone shooting mode. When the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the stand-alone shooting mode.
  • step SH21 when the control unit 220 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the process in step SH18 is executed. In step SH21, when the control unit 220 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the control unit 220 stores setting mode information indicating an arbitrary operation mode in the memory 120 (step SH22).
  • step SH22 the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating that activation is performed in an arbitrary operation mode to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210 (step SH23).
  • the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the activation mode information is activated in the operation mode indicated by the activation mode information in step SA34 in FIG.
  • FIG. 35 shows a command processing procedure in step SJ. The process shown in FIG. 35 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SJ10 when the control unit 220 determines that the control command is not accepted by the user interface 230, the process in step SJ20 is executed. If the control unit 220 determines in step SJ12 that the first remaining amount information has not been received, the process in step SJ20 is executed.
  • step SJ13 the control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode (step SJ20).
  • the control unit 220 receives the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
  • step SJ20 control unit 220 determines whether or not the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information are received from imaging device 10.
  • the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone imaging mode.
  • the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has not been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone imaging mode.
  • step SJ20 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has not been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode, the command processing ends.
  • step SJ20 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 has been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 220 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 200. The updated setting mode information indicates the stand-alone shooting mode (step SJ21).
  • step SJ21 the control unit 220 updates the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 200 based on the second remaining amount information. As a result, the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 200 becomes the same as the second battery remaining amount B2 indicated by the second remaining amount information (step SJ22). By executing the processing in step SJ22, the command processing ends.
  • the remaining battery level is managed in each of the first and second operation modes. Even when the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first or second operation mode, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates is likely to increase by switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. That is, a state in which processing in another operation mode cannot be performed is less likely to occur due to a decrease in the remaining battery level in the operation mode set in the imaging apparatus 10.
  • the communication device 20 determines a method for updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. While the battery 110 is being charged, the imaging device 10 updates the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount according to the update method determined by the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 220 transmits method information to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the method information indicates how to update the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level while the battery 110 is being charged.
  • the update method is a method in which the first battery remaining amount is preferentially increased over the second battery remaining amount as the remaining amount of the battery 110 increases.
  • the control unit 140 receives method information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. While the battery 110 is being charged, the control unit 140 gives priority to the first battery remaining amount over the second battery remaining amount according to the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 according to the update method indicated by the received method information. Increase.
  • FIG. 36 shows an operation procedure of the communication device 20. The process shown in FIG. 36 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SJ remaining amount determination processing is executed (step SM).
  • step SM a process for determining a battery remaining amount update method is executed.
  • step SK the process in step SK is executed.
  • FIG. 37 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The operation of the communication device 20 in the remaining amount determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SM10).
  • step SM10 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the remaining amount determination process ends.
  • step SM10 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM11).
  • the method information generated in step SM11 indicates a method of giving priority to the increase in the first battery remaining amount B1 over the increase in the second battery remaining amount B2.
  • step SM12 the control unit 220 transmits method information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210 (step SM12).
  • the process in step SM12 is executed, the remaining amount determination process ends.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information updates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 by the process illustrated in FIG. 12 while the battery 110 is being charged.
  • the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
  • FIG. 38 shows the remaining amount determination processing procedure in the second modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. The process shown in FIG. 38 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SM10 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM20).
  • the method information generated in step SM20 indicates a method of increasing the second battery remaining amount B2 for a predetermined time after increasing the first battery remaining amount B1 for a predetermined time.
  • the method information generated in step SM20 may indicate a method for repeatedly executing the method.
  • step SM20 the process in step SM12 is executed.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information updates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 by the process illustrated in FIG. 13 while the battery 110 is being charged.
  • the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
  • the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount and a second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of image data generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging. When the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit 220 increases the first battery remaining amount.
  • the memory 120 of the imaging device 10 stores the number of untransferred images.
  • the number of untransferred images is the number of image data that is generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging and is not transferred to the communication device 20.
  • the number of untransferred images is an integer of 0 or more. When image data is generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging, the number of untransferred images increases by one. When the image data stored in the memory 120 is transferred to the communication device 20, the number of untransferred images is reduced by one.
  • the control unit 140 transmits untransferred image information indicating the number of untransferred images to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130.
  • the control unit 220 of the communication device 20 receives untransferred image information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of untransferred images.
  • the first operation mode in the eighth embodiment is an image transfer mode.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 according to the eighth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 39 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control unit 140 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120 (step SG60).
  • step SG60 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the communication mode, the power management process ends.
  • step SG60 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 reads the number of untransferred images Ct from the memory 120 (step SG61). After step SG61, the control unit 140 transmits untransferred image information indicating the number of untransferred images Ct to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. Thereby, the control part 140 notifies the communication apparatus 20 of the number Ct of untransferred images (step SG62).
  • control unit 140 receives the remaining amount change information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the remaining amount change information indicates the changed first battery remaining amount B1 and second battery remaining amount B2.
  • control unit 140 determines whether or not remaining amount change information has been received from communication device 20 (step SG63).
  • step SG63 when the control unit 140 determines that the remaining amount change information is not received from the communication device 20, the power management process ends.
  • step SG63 when the control unit 140 determines that the remaining amount change information has been received from the communication device 20, the control unit 140 determines the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount based on the remaining amount change information. Change B2.
  • the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120 becomes the same as the first battery remaining amount B1 indicated by the remaining amount change information.
  • the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120 becomes the same as the second battery remaining amount B2 indicated by the remaining amount change information (step SG64).
  • FIG. 40 shows an operation procedure of the communication device 20. The process shown in FIG. 40 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SJ power management processing is executed (step SN).
  • the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount are adjusted by the power management process.
  • step SN the process in step SK is executed.
  • FIG. 41 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SN. The operation of the communication device 20 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SN10).
  • step SN10 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the power management process ends.
  • step SN10 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 determines whether untransferred image information is received from the imaging device 10 (step SN11). . When untransferred image information is transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the untransferred image information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • step SN11 when the control unit 220 determines that untransferred image information has not been received from the imaging device 10, the power management process ends.
  • the control unit 220 determines in step SN11 that untransferred image information has been received from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 stores the number of untransferred images Ct indicated by the untransferred image information in the memory 200 (step SN12). .
  • step SN13 After step SN12, the process in step SN13 is executed. Processing in each of steps SN13 to SN19 is the same as the processing in each of steps SG40 to SG46 shown in FIG. The processing subject in each of steps SN13 to SN19 is control unit 220.
  • step SN19 the control unit 220 transmits the remaining amount change information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SN20).
  • the remaining amount change information indicates the first remaining battery amount B1 and the second remaining battery amount B2 that have been changed by the process in step SN19.
  • the control unit 220 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 based on the number of image data (the number of untransferred images Ct) generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. It is determined whether or not (step SN16). When the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is increased, the control unit 220 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SN19).
  • the process shown in FIG. 41 may be executed only when the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the image transfer mode.
  • the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can ensure the first remaining battery level necessary for image transfer.
  • the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount and a second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data stored in the memory 200. When the control unit 220 determines that the second battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit 220 increases the second battery remaining amount.
  • the memory 120 of the imaging apparatus 10 stores the scheduled number of shots.
  • the scheduled number of images is the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging.
  • the planned number of shots is an integer of 1 or more.
  • the scheduled number of images is reduced by one.
  • the control unit 140 transmits shooting schedule information indicating the number of shots to be shot to the communication device 20 via the communication device 130.
  • the control unit 220 of the communication device 20 receives the shooting schedule information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the scheduled number of images indicated by the imaging schedule information.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 of the ninth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 42 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG.
  • the process shown in FIG. 42 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SG60 when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 reads the scheduled number of images Cs from the memory 120 (step SG70). After step SG70, the control unit 140 transmits shooting schedule information indicating the shooting schedule number Cs to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. Thereby, the control unit 140 notifies the communication device 20 of the scheduled number of images Cs (step SG71). After step SG71, the process in step SG63 is executed.
  • the communication device 20 of the ninth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 43 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SN.
  • the process shown in FIG. 43 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SN30).
  • step SN30 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the power management process ends.
  • step SN30 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 determines whether or not shooting schedule information has been received from the imaging device 10 (step SN31). When the shooting schedule information is transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the shooting schedule information from the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
  • step SN31 when the control unit 220 determines that the shooting schedule information is not received from the imaging device 10, the power management process ends.
  • step SN31 when the control unit 220 determines that the shooting schedule information is received from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 stores the scheduled shooting number Cs indicated by the shooting schedule information in the memory 200 (step SN32).
  • step SN33 After step SN32, the process in step SN33 is executed. Processing in each of steps SN33 to SN39 is the same as the processing in each of steps SG50 to SG56 shown in FIG. 19 except for the processing subject. The processing subject in each of steps SN33 to SN39 is the control unit 220.
  • step SN39 the control unit 220 transmits the remaining amount change information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SN40).
  • the remaining amount change information indicates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 that have been changed by the process in step SN39.
  • the control unit 220 calculates the second battery remaining amount B2 based on the number of image data (scheduled number of images Cs) that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. It is determined whether or not to increase (step SN36). When the control unit 140 determines to increase the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SN39).
  • the control unit 220 increases the second battery remaining amount.
  • the imaging device 10 can secure the second battery remaining amount necessary for capturing an image.
  • the imaging device 10 can acquire more image data than in the remote shooting mode. For this reason, the imaging device 10 can acquire the image data of the scheduled number of images more reliably.
  • the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount and a second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
  • the control unit 220 transmits method information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210.
  • the method information indicates how to update the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level while the battery 110 is being charged. According to the update method, as the remaining amount of the battery 110 increases, the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority among the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level is higher than the remaining battery levels. It is a method of increasing priority.
  • the control unit 140 receives method information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. While the battery 110 is being charged, the control unit 140 gives priority to the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount according to the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 according to the update method indicated by the received method information. The remaining battery level determined to increase is given priority over other remaining battery levels.
  • the imaging apparatus 10 of the tenth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG.
  • the communication device 20 of the tenth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 44 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The operation of the communication device 20 in the remaining amount determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SM30).
  • step SM30 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the remaining amount determination process ends.
  • step SM30 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 200 (step SM31). After step SM31, control unit 220 reads second battery remaining amount B2 from memory 200 (step SM32). The order of processing in step SM31 and step SM32 may be switched. After step SM32, the control unit 220 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SM33).
  • step SM33 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM34).
  • the method information generated in step SM34 indicates a method of giving priority to the increase in the second battery remaining amount B2 over the increase in the first battery remaining amount B1.
  • step SM36 the control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
  • step SM36 When the process in step SM36 is executed, the remaining amount determination process ends.
  • step SM33 when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM35).
  • the method information generated in step SM35 indicates a method of giving priority to the increase in the first battery remaining amount B1 over the increase in the second battery remaining amount B2.
  • control unit 220 prioritizes increasing the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Is determined (step SM33).
  • the control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
  • the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information is determined to preferentially increase the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount based on the method information while the battery 110 is being charged. Increase the priority over other battery levels.
  • the control unit 220 determines a battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. As a result, priority is given to a smaller battery remaining amount of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount, a second battery remaining amount, a first battery capacity, and a second battery capacity. Based on the first ratio and the second ratio, the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased.
  • the first ratio is a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity.
  • the second ratio is a ratio of the second remaining battery capacity to the second battery capacity.
  • FIG. 45 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The process shown in FIG. 45 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SM32 the controller 220 calculates a first ratio P1 of the first remaining battery charge B1 with respect to the first battery capacity (step SM40).
  • step SM40 the controller 220 calculates a second ratio P2 of the second battery remaining amount B2 with respect to the second battery capacity (step SM41).
  • step SM41 control unit 220 determines whether or not first ratio P1 is greater than second ratio P2 (step SM42).
  • step SM42 when the control unit 220 determines that the first ratio P1 is larger than the second ratio P2, the process in step SM34 is executed. In step SM42, when the control unit 220 determines that the first ratio P1 is equal to or less than the second ratio P2, the process in step SM35 is executed.
  • the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio P1 and the second ratio P2. (Step SM42).
  • the control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
  • the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information is determined to preferentially increase the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount based on the method information while the battery 110 is being charged. Increase the priority over other battery levels.
  • the control unit 220 determines the remaining battery amount to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio. As a result, priority is given to a battery remaining amount having a smaller ratio to the battery capacity allocated to each operation mode out of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • the memory 200 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Furthermore, the memory 200 stores a first number of image data that is to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging.
  • the control unit 140 counts the second number of image data generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging.
  • the control unit 140 transmits image number information indicating the first number and the second number to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
  • the control unit 220 of the communication device 20 receives the image number information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
  • the control unit 220 calculates a first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number is transmitted to the communication device 20.
  • the control unit 220 calculates a second estimated value of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number. Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased.
  • the first operation mode in the second modification of the tenth embodiment is an image transfer mode.
  • FIG. 46 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The process shown in FIG. 46 is different from the process shown in FIG.
  • step SM30 when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 determines whether the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information are received from the imaging device 10. (Step SM50). When the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information are transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
  • step SM50 When the control unit 220 determines that the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information are not received from the imaging device 10 in step SM50, the remaining amount determination process ends.
  • the control unit 220 determines that the scheduled shooting information and the untransferred image information are received from the imaging device 10 in step SM50, the control unit 220 displays the scheduled shooting number Cs indicated by the scheduled shooting information and the untransferred image information indicated by the untransferred image information.
  • the number of transferred images Ct is stored in the memory 200 (step SM51). After step SM51, the process in step SM31 is executed.
  • step SM32 the process in step SM52 is executed.
  • Processing in each of step SM52 to step SM56 is the same as the processing in each of steps SF60 to SF64 shown in FIG.
  • the processing subject in each of steps SM52 to SM56 is control unit 220.
  • step SM56 when the control unit 220 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is larger than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SM34 is executed. In step SM56, when the control unit 220 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is equal to or less than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SM35 is executed.
  • the control unit 220 includes the first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number (the number Ct of untransferred images) is transmitted to the communication device 20.
  • First estimated remaining amount B1 ′ is calculated (step SM55).
  • the control unit 220 uses the second estimated value (second estimated remaining amount B2 ′) of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number (scheduled number of images Cs). ) Is calculated (step SM54). Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased (step SM56).
  • the controller 220 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (step SM34 and step SM35). .
  • the control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
  • the memory 200 may store a first time when the imaging device 10 operates in the previous first operation mode and a second time when the imaging device 10 operates in the previous second operation mode.
  • the controller 220 may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first time and the second time. For example, when the first time is longer than the second time, the control unit 220 determines to increase the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. Further, when the first time is equal to or shorter than the second time, the control unit 220 determines to increase the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110.
  • the control unit 220 determines the battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first estimated remaining amount B1 'and the second estimated remaining amount B2'. As a result, of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount, priority is given to the remaining battery remaining amount after the scheduled operation is performed. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
  • a state in which imaging cannot be performed is less likely to occur due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication.
  • Imaging apparatus 10 Imaging apparatus 20 Communication apparatus 30 Lens module 100 Image sensor 110 Battery 120,200 Memory 130,210 Communication apparatus 140,220 Control part 150,230 User interface 151 Shutter button 152 Power button 240 Display

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)

Abstract

When an imaging device is operating in a first operation mode, a control unit determines whether or not the imaging device can continue operation in the first operation mode, on the basis of a first residual battery capacity. When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue operation in the first operation mode, the control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to a second operation mode. The first residual battery capacity is residual capacity that can be used in the first operation mode but cannot be used in the second operation mode.

Description

撮像装置、通信装置、撮像システム、撮像モード制御方法、およびプログラムImaging apparatus, communication apparatus, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program
 本発明は、撮像装置、通信装置、撮像システム、撮像モード制御方法、およびプログラムに関する。 The present invention relates to an imaging device, a communication device, an imaging system, an imaging mode control method, and a program.
 条件に応じて画像データを他の端末に転送するデジタルカメラが特許文献1に開示されている。撮像が行われた後にバッテリー残量が十分でない場合、デジタルカメラは画像データの転送を行わない。 A digital camera that transfers image data to another terminal according to conditions is disclosed in Patent Document 1. If the remaining battery level is insufficient after the image is taken, the digital camera does not transfer image data.
日本国特許第4336064号公報Japanese Patent No. 4336064
 撮像が行われた後にバッテリー残量が十分でない場合、特許文献1に開示されたデジタルカメラは画像データ以外のデータの通信を行うことができる。画像データ以外のデータの通信により、撮影のための電力が消費される。 If the remaining battery level is insufficient after the image is taken, the digital camera disclosed in Patent Document 1 can communicate data other than image data. Communication for data other than image data consumes power for photographing.
 本発明は、通信時のバッテリー残量の低下により撮像が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる撮像装置、通信装置、撮像システム、撮像モード制御方法、およびプログラムを提供することを目的とする。 An object of the present invention is to provide an imaging device, a communication device, an imaging system, an imaging mode control method, and a program that are unlikely to cause a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in a remaining battery level during communication.
 本発明の第1の態様によれば、撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、メモリ、通信機、制御部、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記メモリは、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶する。前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する。前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える。前記第1の動作モードは、前記通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記制御部が実行する制御に使用される制御情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the first aspect of the present invention, the imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a memory, a communication device, a control unit, and a user interface. The memory stores a first remaining battery level that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Judging. When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. . In the first operation mode, the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operation mode in which at least one of the following is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control executed by the control unit is received from the communication device by the communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device. In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. This is an operation mode for executing imaging based on the above. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 本発明の第2の態様によれば、第1の態様において、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、設定情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信してもよい。前記設定情報は、前記撮像装置が前記第2の動作モードで動作しているときに前記撮像装置に設定される内容を示す。前記設定情報が受信された後、前記制御部は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えてもよい。 According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect, when the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit transmits the setting information to the You may receive from the said communication apparatus with a communication apparatus. The setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device when the imaging device is operating in the second operation mode. After the setting information is received, the control unit may switch the operation mode of the imaging apparatus from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
 本発明の第3の態様によれば、第1の態様において、前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成された前記画像データの数をカウントしてもよい。前記制御部は、カウントされた前記画像データの前記数に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断してもよい。前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やしてもよい。 According to the third aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect, the control unit may count the number of the image data generated by the image sensor executing the imaging. The control unit may determine whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of the counted image data. When the control unit determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit may increase the first battery remaining amount.
 本発明の第4の態様によれば、第1の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶してもよい。前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数に基づいて、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断してもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やしてもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新されてもよい。 According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect, the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. The control unit may determine whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor performs the imaging. When the control unit determines to increase the second battery remaining amount, the control unit may increase the second battery remaining amount. The second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第5の態様によれば、第1の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶してもよい。前記バッテリーの充電中、前記制御部は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を前記第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やしてもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新されてもよい。 According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect, the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. During the charging of the battery, the control unit may increase the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery amount. The second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第6の態様によれば、第1の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶してもよい。前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断してもよい。前記バッテリーの充電中、前記制御部は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やしてもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新されてもよい。 According to a sixth aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect, the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. The control unit determines whether the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. May be. During charging of the battery, the control unit determines that priority is given to increasing the remaining amount of the first battery and the remaining amount of the second battery according to an increase in the remaining amount of the battery. May be given priority over other battery levels. The second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第7の態様によれば、第6の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶してもよい。前記制御部は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断してもよい。前記第1のバッテリー容量は、前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー容量は、前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であってもよい。前記第1の比率は、前記第1のバッテリー容量に対する前記第1のバッテリー残量の比率であってもよい。前記第2の比率は、前記第2のバッテリー容量に対する前記第2のバッテリー残量の比率であってもよい。 According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, in the sixth aspect, the memory may further store a first battery capacity and a second battery capacity. The controller may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio. The first battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the first operation mode and not assigned to the second operation mode. The second battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the second operation mode and not assigned to the first operation mode. The first ratio may be a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity. The second ratio may be a ratio of the second battery remaining amount to the second battery capacity.
 本発明の第8の態様によれば、通信装置は、メモリ、第1の通信機、および制御部を有する。撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記メモリは、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶する。前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する。前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、切替指示を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信する。前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す。前記第1の動作モードは、前記第1の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第1の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the communication device includes a memory, a first communication device, and a control unit. The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface. The memory stores a first remaining battery level that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Judging. When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. In the first operation mode, the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the first communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the second communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. . In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 本発明の第9の態様によれば、第8の態様において、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、設定情報および前記切替指示を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信してもよい。前記設定情報は、前記撮像装置が前記第2の動作モードで動作しているときに前記撮像装置に設定される内容を示してもよい。 According to a ninth aspect of the present invention, in the eighth aspect, when the control unit determines that the imaging apparatus cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit A switching instruction may be transmitted to the imaging apparatus by the first communication device. The setting information may indicate content set in the imaging device when the imaging device is operating in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第10の態様によれば、第8の態様において、前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成された前記画像データの数に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断してもよい。前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やしてもよい。 According to a tenth aspect of the present invention, in the eighth aspect, the control unit includes the first battery based on the number of the image data generated by the image sensor executing the imaging. It may be determined whether or not the remaining amount is increased. When the control unit determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit may increase the first battery remaining amount.
 本発明の第11の態様によれば、第8の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶してもよい。前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数に基づいて、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断してもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やしてもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新されてもよい。 According to the eleventh aspect of the present invention, in the eighth aspect, the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. The control unit may determine whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor performs the imaging. When the control unit determines to increase the second battery remaining amount, the control unit may increase the second battery remaining amount. The second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第12の態様によれば、第8の態様において、前記制御部は、方法情報を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信してもよい。前記方法情報は、前記バッテリーの充電中における前記第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を示してもよい。前記更新方法は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を前記第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす方法であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新されてもよい。 According to a twelfth aspect of the present invention, in the eighth aspect, the control unit may transmit method information to the imaging device by the first communication device. The method information may indicate a method of updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount during charging of the battery. The updating method may be a method in which the first battery remaining amount is increased in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery amount. The second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第13の態様によれば、第8の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶してもよい。前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断してもよい。前記制御部は、方法情報を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信してもよい。前記方法情報は、前記バッテリーの充電中における前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を示してもよい。前記更新方法は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす方法であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新されてもよい。 According to the thirteenth aspect of the present invention, in the eighth aspect, the memory may further store a second remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. The control unit determines whether the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. May be. The control unit may transmit method information to the imaging apparatus by the first communication device. The method information may indicate a method for updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount during charging of the battery. According to the update method, the remaining battery level determined to increase preferentially among the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery level. It may be a method of increasing priority over the method. The second battery remaining amount may be a remaining battery amount that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount may be updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
 本発明の第14の態様によれば、第13の態様において、前記メモリはさらに、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶してもよい。前記制御部は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断してもよい。前記第1のバッテリー容量は、前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であってもよい。前記第2のバッテリー容量は、前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であってもよい。前記第1の比率は、前記第1のバッテリー容量に対する前記第1のバッテリー残量の比率であってもよい。前記第2の比率は、前記第2のバッテリー容量に対する前記第2のバッテリー残量の比率であってもよい。 According to a fourteenth aspect of the present invention, in the thirteenth aspect, the memory may further store a first battery capacity and a second battery capacity. The controller may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio. The first battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the first operation mode and not assigned to the second operation mode. The second battery capacity may be a battery capacity that is assigned to the second operation mode and not assigned to the first operation mode. The first ratio may be a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity. The second ratio may be a ratio of the second battery remaining amount to the second battery capacity.
 本発明の第15の態様によれば、撮像システムは、撮像装置および通信装置を有する。前記通信装置は、メモリ、第1の通信機、および第1の制御部を有する。前記撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、第2の制御部、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記メモリは、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶する。前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記第1の制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する。前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記第1の制御部が判断した場合、前記第1の制御部は、切替指示を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信する。前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す。前記第2の制御部は、前記第2の通信機によって前記切替指示を前記通信装置から受信する。前記第2の制御部は、受信された前記切替指示に基づいて前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える。前記第1の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記第2の制御部が実行する制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the fifteenth aspect of the present invention, the imaging system includes an imaging device and a communication device. The communication device includes a memory, a first communication device, and a first control unit. The imaging apparatus includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, a second control unit, and a user interface. The memory stores a first remaining battery level that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery. When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the first control unit can continue the operation of the imaging device in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Determine whether or not. When the first control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the first control unit transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device. To do. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. The second control unit receives the switching instruction from the communication device by the second communication device. The second control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus from the first operation mode to the second operation mode based on the received switching instruction. In the first operation mode, the second communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the second communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control executed by the second control unit is received from the communication device by the second communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. . In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 本発明の第16の態様によれば、撮像モード制御方法は、第1のステップおよび第2のステップを有する。前記第1のステップは、撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記撮像装置において、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断するステップである。前記第2のステップは、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、前記撮像装置において、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えるステップである。前記撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい。前記第1の動作モードは、前記通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the sixteenth aspect of the present invention, the imaging mode control method includes a first step and a second step. In the first step, when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, in the imaging device, the imaging device performs an operation in the first operation mode based on a first remaining battery level. It is a step of determining whether or not it can be continued. In the second step, when it is determined that the imaging apparatus cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, in the imaging apparatus, the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. This is a step of switching to the operation mode. The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery. In the first operation mode, the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operation mode in which at least one of the following is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device. In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. This is an operation mode for executing imaging based on the above. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 本発明の第17の態様によれば、撮像モード制御方法は、第1のステップおよび第2のステップを有する。前記第1のステップは、撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、通信装置において、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断するステップである。前記第2のステップは、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、前記通信装置において、切替指示を第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信するステップである。前記通信装置は、前記第1の通信機を有する。撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい。前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す。前記第1の動作モードは、前記第1の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the seventeenth aspect of the present invention, the imaging mode control method has a first step and a second step. In the first step, when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the imaging device continues to operate in the first operation mode in the communication device based on the first remaining battery level. This is a step of determining whether or not it is possible. The second step is a step of transmitting a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device in the communication device when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode. is there. The communication device includes the first communication device. The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. In the first operation mode, the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the second communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the second communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. . In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 本発明の第18の態様によれば、プログラムは、第1のステップおよび第2のステップを撮像装置のコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムである。前記第1のステップは、前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断するステップである。前記第2のステップは、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えるステップである。前記撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい。前記第1の動作モードは、前記通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the eighteenth aspect of the present invention, the program is a program for causing the computer of the imaging apparatus to execute the first step and the second step. In the first step, when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. This is a step for determining whether or not. The second step is a step of switching the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode. It is. The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery. In the first operation mode, the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operation mode in which at least one of the following is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device. In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. This is an operation mode for executing imaging based on the above. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 本発明の第19の態様によれば、プログラムは、第1のステップおよび第2のステップを通信装置のコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムである。前記第1のステップは、撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断するステップである。前記第2のステップは、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、切替指示を第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信するステップである。前記通信装置は、前記第1の通信機を有する。撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有する。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい。前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す。前記第1の動作モードは、前記第1の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理である。前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理である。前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 According to the nineteenth aspect of the present invention, the program is a program for causing the computer of the communication device to execute the first step and the second step. In the first step, when the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, whether or not the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. This is a step for judging. The second step is a step of transmitting a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode. The communication device includes the first communication device. The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface. The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. In the first operation mode, the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and This is an operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed. The first process is a process in which image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging is transmitted to the communication device by the second communication device. The second process is a process in which control information used for control in the imaging apparatus is received from the communication apparatus by the second communication device. The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. . In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. This is an operation mode in which imaging is executed based on an operation that is performed. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 上記の各態様によれば、通信時のバッテリー残量の低下により撮像が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 According to each aspect described above, a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication is less likely to occur.
本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像システムの構成図である。1 is a configuration diagram of an imaging system according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像装置の構成を示すブロック図である。1 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an imaging apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態の変形例の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の第1の変形例の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st modification of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の第2の変形例の通信装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the communication apparatus of the 2nd modification of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の第2の変形例の通信装置のディスプレイの画面を示す参考図である。It is a reference figure showing the screen of the display of the communication apparatus of the 2nd modification of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第2の実施形態の第2の変形例の通信装置のディスプレイの画面を示す参考図である。It is a reference figure showing the screen of the display of the communication apparatus of the 2nd modification of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第3の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第5の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第5の実施形態の第1の変形例の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 1st modification of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第5の実施形態の第2の変形例の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 2nd modification of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第6の実施形態の変形例の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the modification of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の第1の変形例の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 1st modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の第1の変形例の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 1st modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第7の実施形態の第2の変形例の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 2nd modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第8の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第8の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第8の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第9の実施形態の撮像装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the imaging device of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第9の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第10の実施形態の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第10の実施形態の第1の変形例の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 1st modification of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第10の実施形態の第2の変形例の通信装置の動作の手順を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of operation | movement of the communication apparatus of the 2nd modification of the 10th Embodiment of this invention.
 図面を参照し、本発明の実施形態を説明する。 Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
 (第1の実施形態)
 図1は、本発明の第1の実施形態の撮像システム1の構成を示す。図1に示すように、撮像システム1は、撮像装置10、通信装置20、およびレンズモジュール30を有する。
(First embodiment)
FIG. 1 shows a configuration of an imaging system 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the imaging system 1 includes an imaging device 10, a communication device 20, and a lens module 30.
 シャッターボタン151および電源ボタン152が撮像装置10の表面に配置されている。通信装置20は、撮像装置10と無線通信を行う。通信装置20の背面にディスプレイ240が配置されている。通信装置20は、画像表示装置である。レンズモジュール30は、フォーカスレンズおよびズームレンズ等のレンズを有する。図1において、レンズモジュール30は撮像装置10に装着されている。撮像装置10とレンズモジュール30とは分離可能であってもよい。撮像装置10がレンズモジュール30内のレンズを有していてもよい。 A shutter button 151 and a power button 152 are arranged on the surface of the imaging device 10. The communication device 20 performs wireless communication with the imaging device 10. A display 240 is disposed on the back surface of the communication device 20. The communication device 20 is an image display device. The lens module 30 includes lenses such as a focus lens and a zoom lens. In FIG. 1, the lens module 30 is attached to the imaging device 10. The imaging device 10 and the lens module 30 may be separable. The imaging device 10 may have a lens in the lens module 30.
 通信装置20は、撮像装置10を制御する制御装置として機能する。通信装置20は、撮像装置10によって取得された画像データを蓄積する画像蓄積装置であってもよい。 The communication device 20 functions as a control device that controls the imaging device 10. The communication device 20 may be an image storage device that stores image data acquired by the imaging device 10.
 図2は、撮像装置10の構成を示す。図2に示すように、撮像装置10は、イメージセンサ100、バッテリー110、メモリ120、通信機130(第2の通信機)、制御部140(第2の制御部)、およびユーザインターフェース150を有する。 FIG. 2 shows the configuration of the imaging apparatus 10. As illustrated in FIG. 2, the imaging apparatus 10 includes an image sensor 100, a battery 110, a memory 120, a communication device 130 (second communication device), a control unit 140 (second control unit), and a user interface 150. .
 撮像装置10の概略構成について説明する。メモリ120は、バッテリー110の全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える。第1の動作モードは、通信機130がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置20と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードである。第1の処理は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する処理である。第2の処理は、制御部140が実行する制御に使用される制御情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する処理である。第3の処理は、通信機130によって通信装置20から受信された指示に基づいて、画像データに対する画像処理および画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理である。第2の動作モードは、通信機130がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置20と行うことができず、かつイメージセンサ100がユーザインターフェース150を介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードである。第1のバッテリー残量は、第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。第1のバッテリー残量は、第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。 The schematic configuration of the imaging device 10 will be described. The memory 120 stores a first battery remaining amount that is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110. When the imaging device 10 is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 determines whether the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. To do. When the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. In the first operation mode, the communication device 130 can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device 20, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operation mode in which at least one of the following is executed. The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor 100 performing imaging to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The second process is a process in which control information used for control executed by the control unit 140 is received from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The third process is a process for executing at least one of image processing on image data and addition of information on image data based on an instruction received from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. In the second operation mode, the communication device 130 cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device 20, and the image sensor 100 is based on an operation via the user interface 150. This is an operation mode for executing imaging. The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the first operation mode.
 撮像装置10の詳細な構成について説明する。イメージセンサ100は、CCD(Charge Coupled Device)センサーおよびCMOS(Complementary Metal oxide Semiconductor)センサー等の撮像素子(イメージャ)である。イメージセンサ100は、撮像を実行することにより撮像信号を生成する。イメージセンサ100は、通信装置20から送信された制御情報に基づいて撮像を実行する。あるいは、イメージセンサ100は、ユーザインターフェース150を介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する。 The detailed configuration of the imaging apparatus 10 will be described. The image sensor 100 is an image pickup device (imager) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor. The image sensor 100 generates an imaging signal by executing imaging. The image sensor 100 performs imaging based on the control information transmitted from the communication device 20. Alternatively, the image sensor 100 performs imaging based on an operation via the user interface 150.
 イメージセンサ100によって生成された撮像信号は、図2に示していないA/D変換器によって画像データに変換される。イメージセンサ100がA/D変換器を有し、かつイメージセンサ100が画像データを生成してもよい。画像データは、静止画データ、動画データ、およびライブ画像データである。各実施形態における撮影(shooting)は、イメージセンサ100による撮像(imaging)と、撮像に伴う各種処理とを含む。 The imaging signal generated by the image sensor 100 is converted into image data by an A / D converter not shown in FIG. The image sensor 100 may include an A / D converter, and the image sensor 100 may generate image data. The image data is still image data, moving image data, and live image data. Shooting in each embodiment includes imaging by the image sensor 100 and various processes associated with imaging.
 バッテリー110は、繰り返し充電できる充電池である。例えば、バッテリー110は、リチウムイオン充電池である。バッテリー110は、撮像装置10の動作のための電力を蓄積する。バッテリー110は、撮像装置10に内蔵される。第1のバッテリー容量は、第1の動作モードに割り当てられるバッテリー容量である。第1のバッテリー容量は、0よりも大きく、かつバッテリー110の全体の容量よりも小さい。第1の動作モードにおける撮像装置10の動作により、バッテリー容量は減少する。第1のバッテリー残量は、第1のバッテリー容量から第1の動作モードにおける動作により減少した容量を除いた残りの容量である。第1のバッテリー残量は、バッテリー110の全体の容量または第1のバッテリー容量に対する比率(%)で表されてもよい。 The battery 110 is a rechargeable battery that can be repeatedly charged. For example, the battery 110 is a lithium ion rechargeable battery. The battery 110 stores electric power for the operation of the imaging device 10. The battery 110 is built in the imaging device 10. The first battery capacity is a battery capacity assigned to the first operation mode. The first battery capacity is larger than 0 and smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110. The battery capacity decreases due to the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the first operation mode. The first battery remaining capacity is a remaining capacity obtained by subtracting the capacity reduced by the operation in the first operation mode from the first battery capacity. The first battery remaining amount may be represented by the total capacity of the battery 110 or a ratio (%) to the first battery capacity.
 メモリ120は、揮発性または不揮発性のメモリである。例えば、メモリ120は、RAM(Random Access Memory)、DRAM(DynamicRandom Access Memory)、SRAM(Static Random Access Memory)、ROM(Read Only Memory)、EPROM(Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory)、EEPROM(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory)、およびフラッシュメモリの少なくとも1つである。メモリ120は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データを記憶する。さらに、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー容量および第1のバッテリー残量を記憶する。さらに、メモリ120は、撮像装置10に設定された動作モードおよびパラメータを記憶する。 The memory 120 is a volatile or non-volatile memory. For example, the memory 120, RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (DynamicRandom Access Memory), SRAM (Static Random Access Memory), ROM (Read Only Memory), EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read -Only Memory) and at least one of flash memory. The memory 120 stores image data generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. Furthermore, the memory 120 stores the first battery capacity and the first remaining battery level. Furthermore, the memory 120 stores the operation mode and parameters set in the imaging device 10.
 通信機130は、無線モジュールであり、かつ図2に示していないアンテナを介して通信装置20と無線通信を行う。例えば、無線通信は、WiFi(登録商標)およびBluetooth(登録商標)等の規格に従って行われる。撮像装置10および通信装置20がケーブルで接続され、かつ通信機130はケーブルを介して通信装置20と通信を行ってもよい。例えば、ケーブルを介した通信は、USB(Universal Serial Bus)等の規格に従って行われる。 The communication device 130 is a wireless module and performs wireless communication with the communication device 20 via an antenna not shown in FIG. For example, wireless communication is performed according to standards such as WiFi (registered trademark) and Bluetooth (registered trademark). The imaging device 10 and the communication device 20 may be connected by a cable, and the communication device 130 may communicate with the communication device 20 via the cable. For example, communication via a cable is performed in accordance with a standard such as USB (Universal Serial Bus).
 制御部140は、コントローラである。制御部140は、プロセッサおよび論理回路の少なくとも1つで構成されている。例えば、プロセッサは、CPU(Central Processing Unit)、DSP(Digital Signal Processor)、およびGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)の少なくとも1つである。例えば、論理回路は、特定用途向け集積回路(ASIC)およびFPGA(Field-Programmable Gate Array)の少なくとも1つである。制御部140は、1つまたは複数のプロセッサを含むことができる。制御部140は、1つまたは複数の論理回路を含むことができる。制御部140は、撮像装置10の状態および通信装置20から受信される制御情報に基づいて制御を実行する。 The control unit 140 is a controller. The control unit 140 includes at least one of a processor and a logic circuit. For example, the processor is at least one of a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), and a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). For example, the logic circuit is at least one of an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) and an FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array). The controller 140 can include one or more processors. The control unit 140 can include one or more logic circuits. The control unit 140 executes control based on the state of the imaging device 10 and the control information received from the communication device 20.
 制御部140は、制御部140の動作を規定する命令を含むプログラムを読み込み、かつ読み込まれたプログラムを実行してもよい。つまり、制御部140の機能はソフトウェアにより実現されてもよい。このプログラムは、例えばフラッシュメモリのような「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」により提供されてもよい。また、上述したプログラムは、このプログラムが保存された記憶装置等を有するコンピュータから、伝送媒体を介して、あるいは伝送媒体中の伝送波により撮像装置10に伝送されてもよい。プログラムを伝送する「伝送媒体」は、インターネット等のネットワーク(通信網)や電話回線等の通信回線(通信線)のように、情報を伝送する機能を有する媒体である。また、上述したプログラムは、前述した機能の一部を実現してもよい。さらに、上述したプログラムは、前述した機能をコンピュータに既に記録されているプログラムとの組合せで実現できる差分ファイル(差分プログラム)であってもよい。 The control unit 140 may read a program including an instruction that defines the operation of the control unit 140 and may execute the read program. That is, the function of the control unit 140 may be realized by software. This program may be provided by a “computer-readable recording medium” such as a flash memory. Further, the above-described program may be transmitted from the computer having a storage device or the like in which the program is stored to the imaging device 10 via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium. A “transmission medium” for transmitting a program is a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line. Further, the above-described program may realize a part of the functions described above. Further, the above-described program may be a difference file (difference program) that can realize the above-described function in combination with a program already recorded in the computer.
 制御部140は、画像データまたは情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。具体的には、制御部140は、画像データまたは情報が通信装置20に送信されるように通信機130を制御する。つまり、制御部140は、通信装置20に対する画像データまたは情報を通信機130に送信させる。これによって、通信機130は、画像データまたは情報を通信装置20に送信する。制御部140は、情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。具体的には、制御部140は、情報が通信装置20から受信されるように通信機130を制御する。つまり、制御部140は、通信装置20から送信された情報を通信機130に受信させる。これによって、通信機130は、情報を通信装置20から受信する。 The control unit 140 transmits image data or information to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. Specifically, the control unit 140 controls the communication device 130 so that image data or information is transmitted to the communication device 20. That is, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to transmit image data or information for the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 transmits image data or information to the communication device 20. The control unit 140 receives information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. Specifically, the control unit 140 controls the communication device 130 so that information is received from the communication device 20. That is, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to receive information transmitted from the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 receives information from the communication device 20.
 ユーザインターフェース150は、操作部であり、かつ制御コマンドに対応する指示をユーザから受け付ける。制御コマンドについては後述する。例えば、ユーザインターフェース150は、ボタン、スイッチ、キー、およびタッチパネルの少なくとも1つである。ユーザインターフェース150は、図1に示すシャッターボタン151および電源ボタン152を含む。 The user interface 150 is an operation unit and receives an instruction corresponding to the control command from the user. The control command will be described later. For example, the user interface 150 is at least one of a button, a switch, a key, and a touch panel. The user interface 150 includes a shutter button 151 and a power button 152 shown in FIG.
 シャッターボタン151は、撮影指示をユーザから受け付ける。シャッターボタン151が撮影指示を受け付けたとき、イメージセンサ100は静止画または動画の撮像を実行する。動画に関して、撮影指示は撮影開始指示および撮影終了指示を含む。シャッターボタン151が撮影開始指示を受け付けたとき、イメージセンサ100は動画の撮像を開始する。シャッターボタン151が撮影終了指示を受け付けたとき、イメージセンサ100は動画の撮像を終了する。シャッターボタン151が撮影指示を受け付けたとき、イメージセンサ100は動画の撮像を開始し、かつ所定時間が経過したとき、イメージセンサ100は動画の撮像を終了してもよい。 The shutter button 151 receives a shooting instruction from the user. When the shutter button 151 accepts a shooting instruction, the image sensor 100 executes a still image or a moving image. Regarding the moving image, the shooting instruction includes a shooting start instruction and a shooting end instruction. When the shutter button 151 receives a shooting start instruction, the image sensor 100 starts shooting a moving image. When the shutter button 151 accepts the shooting end instruction, the image sensor 100 ends the moving image shooting. When the shutter button 151 receives a shooting instruction, the image sensor 100 may start capturing a moving image, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, the image sensor 100 may end the moving image capturing.
 電源ボタン152は、電源のオンおよびオフの指示をユーザから受け付ける。撮像装置10がオフである状態で電源ボタン152が電源オンの指示を受け付けたとき、バッテリー110からの電力供給が開始されることにより、撮像装置10の電源がオンになる。撮像装置10がオンである状態で電源ボタン152が電源オフの指示を受け付けたとき、バッテリー110からの電力供給が停止することにより、撮像装置10の電源がオフになる。 The power button 152 receives a power on / off instruction from the user. When the power button 152 receives a power-on instruction while the imaging device 10 is off, the power supply from the battery 110 is started, thereby turning on the imaging device 10. When the power button 152 receives a power-off instruction while the imaging device 10 is on, the power supply from the battery 110 is stopped, whereby the imaging device 10 is powered off.
 制御情報は、制御コマンド、設定情報、および画像付加情報の少なくとも1つを含む。制御コマンドは、ライブ表示開始指示、撮影指示(撮像指示)、パラメータ設定指示、画像転送指示、画像処理実行指示、切替指示、および電源オフ指示等の情報である。ライブ表示開始指示は、ライブ画像の表示を開始することを示す。ライブ画像は、イメージセンサ100が連続的に撮像を実行することにより生成された複数の画像データ(ライブ画像データ)で構成される。ライブ画像は、通信装置20のディスプレイ240によって表示される。ユーザは、表示されたライブ画像によって構図を確認する。撮影指示は、撮影(撮像)を実行することを示す。パラメータ設定指示は、撮像装置10にパラメータを設定することを示す。画像転送指示は、画像データを撮像装置10から通信装置20に転送することを示す。画像処理実行指示は、画像データに対する画像処理および画像データに対する情報付加処理の少なくとも1つを行うことを示す。切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替えることを示す。電源オフ指示は、撮像装置10の電源をオフにすることを示す。 The control information includes at least one of a control command, setting information, and image additional information. The control command is information such as a live display start instruction, a shooting instruction (imaging instruction), a parameter setting instruction, an image transfer instruction, an image processing execution instruction, a switching instruction, and a power-off instruction. The live display start instruction indicates that display of a live image is started. The live image is composed of a plurality of image data (live image data) generated by the image sensor 100 continuously performing imaging. The live image is displayed on the display 240 of the communication device 20. The user confirms the composition with the displayed live image. The shooting instruction indicates that shooting (imaging) is performed. The parameter setting instruction indicates that a parameter is set in the imaging apparatus 10. The image transfer instruction indicates that image data is transferred from the imaging device 10 to the communication device 20. The image processing execution instruction indicates that at least one of image processing for image data and information addition processing for image data is performed. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched. The power-off instruction indicates that the power of the imaging device 10 is turned off.
 設定情報は、撮像装置10に設定されるパラメータである。例えば、設定情報は、撮像パラメータおよび転送パラメータである。例えば、撮像パラメータは、露光時間、ISO(International Organization for Standardization)感度、および画像の解像度等のパラメータである。例えば、転送パラメータは、転送対象の画像データの識別情報および解像度等のパラメータである。 The setting information is a parameter set in the imaging apparatus 10. For example, the setting information is an imaging parameter and a transfer parameter. For example, the imaging parameters are parameters such as exposure time, ISO (International Organization for Standardization) sensitivity, and image resolution. For example, the transfer parameter is a parameter such as identification information and resolution of image data to be transferred.
 画像付加情報は、画像データに付加される情報である。例えば、画像付加情報は、位置情報、撮影者の情報、および被写体の情報である。画像付加情報は、通信装置20から撮像装置10に送信される。通信装置20がGPS(Global Positioning System)受信機を有する場合、位置情報はGPS受信機によって取得される。 Image additional information is information added to image data. For example, the image additional information is position information, photographer information, and subject information. The image additional information is transmitted from the communication device 20 to the imaging device 10. When the communication device 20 has a GPS (Global Positioning System) receiver, the position information is acquired by the GPS receiver.
 制御情報は、OSI(Open Systems Interconnection)参照モデルにおけるアプリケーション層の情報である。制御情報は、OSI参照モデルにおけるデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信により通信装置20から撮像装置10に送信される。 Control information is information on the application layer in the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) reference model. The control information is transmitted from the communication device 20 to the imaging device 10 by wireless communication in the data link layer and higher layers in the OSI reference model.
 複数の動作モードのうちいずれか1つが撮像装置10に設定される。撮像装置10は、設定された動作モードによって規定された動作を実行する。撮像装置10は、撮像装置10に設定される動作モードを切り替えることができる。複数の動作モードは、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードと異なる第3の動作モードを含んでもよい。複数の動作モードは、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのみであってもよい。第1のバッテリー残量は、第1の動作モードでのみ使用できてもよい。 Any one of a plurality of operation modes is set in the imaging device 10. The imaging device 10 performs an operation defined by the set operation mode. The imaging device 10 can switch the operation mode set in the imaging device 10. The plurality of operation modes may include a third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode. The plurality of operation modes may be only the first operation mode and the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount may be used only in the first operation mode.
 例えば、第1の動作モードは、通信モードである。通信モードは、リモート撮影モード、パラメータ設定モード、画像転送モード、および画像処理モードの少なくとも1つを含む。リモート撮影モードは、通信装置20から送信された制御情報すなわち撮影指示に基づいてイメージセンサ100が撮像を実行するモードである。 For example, the first operation mode is a communication mode. The communication mode includes at least one of a remote shooting mode, a parameter setting mode, an image transfer mode, and an image processing mode. The remote imaging mode is a mode in which the image sensor 100 performs imaging based on control information transmitted from the communication device 20, that is, an imaging instruction.
 リモート撮影モードにおいて、制御部140は、ライブ表示開始指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。ライブ表示開始指示が受信された後、制御部140は、ライブ画像の撮像開始をイメージセンサ100に指示する。イメージセンサ100は、ライブ画像の撮像を実行する。制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が連続的に撮像を実行することにより生成された複数の画像データ(ライブ画像)を通信機130によって通信装置20に順次送信する。通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、撮像装置10から受信された画像データに基づいてライブ画像を表示する。イメージセンサ100によってライブ画像の撮像が開始された後、制御部140は、撮影指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。撮影指示が受信された後、制御部140は、静止画または動画の撮像をイメージセンサ100に指示する。イメージセンサ100は、静止画または動画の撮像を実行する。イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データはメモリ120に記憶される。 In the remote shooting mode, the control unit 140 receives a live display start instruction from the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. After the live display start instruction is received, the control unit 140 instructs the image sensor 100 to start capturing a live image. The image sensor 100 captures a live image. The control unit 140 sequentially transmits a plurality of image data (live images) generated when the image sensor 100 continuously performs imaging to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a live image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10. After the live image is started to be captured by the image sensor 100, the control unit 140 receives a photographing instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the photographing instruction is received, the control unit 140 instructs the image sensor 100 to capture a still image or a moving image. The image sensor 100 captures a still image or a moving image. Image data generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging is stored in the memory 120.
 パラメータ設定モードは、通信装置20から送信された設定情報を撮像装置10に設定するモードである。画像転送モードは、画像データを通信装置20に送信するモードである。画像処理モードは、画像データに対する画像処理および画像データに対する情報付加処理の少なくとも1つを行うモードである。 The parameter setting mode is a mode in which setting information transmitted from the communication device 20 is set in the imaging device 10. The image transfer mode is a mode for transmitting image data to the communication device 20. The image processing mode is a mode in which at least one of image processing for image data and information addition processing for image data is performed.
 パラメータ設定モードにおいて、制御部140は、パラメータ設定指示および設定情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。パラメータ設定指示および設定情報が受信された後、制御部140は、設定情報をメモリ120に記憶させる。第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードにおいて、制御部140は、設定情報に基づいてイメージセンサ100等を制御する。 In the parameter setting mode, the control unit 140 receives a parameter setting instruction and setting information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the parameter setting instruction and the setting information are received, the control unit 140 stores the setting information in the memory 120. In the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the control unit 140 controls the image sensor 100 and the like based on the setting information.
 画像転送モードにおいて、制御部140は、画像転送指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。画像転送指示が受信された後、制御部140は、メモリ120から画像データを読み出し、かつ読み出された画像データを通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、撮像装置10から受信された画像データに基づいて静止画または動画を表示する。 In the image transfer mode, the control unit 140 receives an image transfer instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the image transfer instruction is received, the control unit 140 reads the image data from the memory 120 and transmits the read image data to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a still image or a moving image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10.
 画像処理モードにおいて、制御部140は、画像処理実行指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。画像処理実行指示が受信された後、制御部140は、メモリ120から画像データを読み出し、かつ読み出された画像データに対して画像処理を実行する。例えば、制御部140は、画像データに対してフィルタ処理を行うことにより、画質を変更する。あるいは、制御部140は、画像データにスタンプを付加することにより画像を加工する。撮像装置10が画像処理部を有し、かつその画像処理部が画像処理を実行してもよい。 In the image processing mode, the control unit 140 receives an image processing execution instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the image processing execution instruction is received, the control unit 140 reads image data from the memory 120 and executes image processing on the read image data. For example, the control unit 140 changes the image quality by performing filter processing on the image data. Alternatively, the control unit 140 processes the image by adding a stamp to the image data. The imaging device 10 may include an image processing unit, and the image processing unit may execute image processing.
 あるいは、画像処理モードにおいて、制御部140は、画像処理実行指示および画像付加情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。画像処理実行指示が受信された後、制御部140は、メモリ120から画像データを読み出し、かつ読み出された画像データに対して画像付加情報を付加する。画像処理モードにおいて処理された画像データは、画像転送モードにおいて通信装置20に送信されてもよい。 Alternatively, in the image processing mode, the control unit 140 receives an image processing execution instruction and image additional information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. After the image processing execution instruction is received, the control unit 140 reads image data from the memory 120 and adds image additional information to the read image data. The image data processed in the image processing mode may be transmitted to the communication device 20 in the image transfer mode.
 例えば、第2の動作モードは、スタンドアロン撮影モードである。スタンドアロン撮影モードは、ユーザインターフェース150を介した操作に基づいてイメージセンサ100が撮像を実行するモードである。画像データは、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードの少なくとも1つにおいて生成される。スタンドアロン撮影モードにおいて、ユーザインターフェース150を介した操作により撮影が指示されたとき、制御部140は、静止画または動画の撮像をイメージセンサ100に指示する。イメージセンサ100は、静止画または動画の撮像を実行する。イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データはメモリ120に記憶される。スタンドアロン撮影モードにおいて、通信機130は、無線通信を通信装置20と行わない。制御部140は、通信機130をオフにさせてもよい。つまり、制御部140は、バッテリー110から通信機130への電力供給を停止してもよい。 For example, the second operation mode is a stand-alone shooting mode. The stand-alone imaging mode is a mode in which the image sensor 100 executes imaging based on an operation via the user interface 150. The image data is generated in at least one of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the stand-alone shooting mode, when shooting is instructed by an operation via the user interface 150, the control unit 140 instructs the image sensor 100 to capture a still image or a moving image. The image sensor 100 captures a still image or a moving image. Image data generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging is stored in the memory 120. In the stand-alone shooting mode, the communication device 130 does not perform wireless communication with the communication device 20. The control unit 140 may turn off the communication device 130. That is, the control unit 140 may stop power supply from the battery 110 to the communication device 130.
 スタンドアロン撮影モードでは通信が行われない。このため、スタンドアロン撮影モードでは、リモート撮影モードと比較して、撮影による消費電力が少ない。言い換えると、スタンドアロン撮影モードでは、リモート撮影モードと比較して、撮像装置10は、より多くの画像データを取得することができる。 Communication is not performed in stand-alone shooting mode. For this reason, the stand-alone shooting mode consumes less power by shooting compared to the remote shooting mode. In other words, in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 can acquire more image data than in the remote shooting mode.
 ユーザインターフェース150は、制御コマンドとして、動作モードの切替を示す切替指示を受け付けてもよい。制御部140は、ユーザインターフェース150によって受け付けられた切替指示に基づいて撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替える。例えば、切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えることを示す。制御部140は、その切替指示に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替える。あるいは、切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードをスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替えることを示す。制御部140は、その切替指示に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードをスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替える。 The user interface 150 may accept a switching instruction indicating switching of the operation mode as a control command. The control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 based on the switching instruction received by the user interface 150. For example, the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. Based on the switching instruction, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. Alternatively, the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode. Based on the switching instruction, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode.
 図3は、撮像装置10の動作の手順を示す。図3を参照して撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 3 shows an operation procedure of the imaging apparatus 10. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
 撮像装置10の電源がオフであるとき、電源ボタン152が電源オンの指示を受け付けることにより起動処理が実行される(ステップSA)。起動処理により、撮像装置10が起動する。起動処理が実行された後、動作モード管理処理が実行される(ステップSB)。動作モード管理処理により、撮像装置10の動作モードが制御される。動作モード管理処理が実行された後、コマンド処理が実行される(ステップSC)。コマンド処理により、制御コマンドに応じた処理が実行される。 When the imaging apparatus 10 is powered off, the power button 152 accepts a power-on instruction to execute a startup process (step SA). The imaging device 10 is activated by the activation process. After the startup process is executed, an operation mode management process is executed (step SB). The operation mode of the imaging device 10 is controlled by the operation mode management process. After the operation mode management process is executed, a command process is executed (step SC). Processing according to the control command is executed by command processing.
 コマンド処理が実行された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の使用が終了したか否かを判断する(ステップSD)。撮像装置10の使用が終了したか否かを示すフラグがメモリ120に保存される。起動処理が実行されたとき、制御部140は、撮像装置10が使用中であることを示す値を持つフラグをメモリ120に記憶させる。通信機130によって電源オフ指示が受信されたとき、または電源ボタン152が電源オフの指示を受け付けたとき、制御部140は、メモリ120に保存されたフラグの値を、撮像装置10の使用が終了したことを示す値に更新する。 After the command processing is executed, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the use of the imaging device 10 is finished (step SD). A flag indicating whether or not the use of the imaging device 10 has been completed is stored in the memory 120. When the activation process is executed, the control unit 140 causes the memory 120 to store a flag having a value indicating that the imaging apparatus 10 is in use. When a power-off instruction is received by the communication device 130 or when the power button 152 receives a power-off instruction, the control unit 140 uses the value of the flag stored in the memory 120 and ends the use of the imaging device 10. Update to a value indicating that
 ステップSDにおいて、撮像装置10の使用が終了していないと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSBにおける処理が実行される。撮像装置10の使用が終了していない場合、ステップSBおよびステップSCにおける処理が繰り返し実行される。ステップSDにおいて、撮像装置10の使用が終了したと制御部140が判断した場合、終了処理が実行される(ステップSE)。終了処理において、制御部140は、バッテリー110からの電力供給を停止させることにより、撮像装置10の電源をオフにする。撮像装置10が通信モードで動作している場合、終了処理において、制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に切断させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20との通信接続を切断する。 In step SD, when the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has not ended, the processing in step SB is executed. If the use of the imaging device 10 has not ended, the processes in step SB and step SC are repeatedly executed. In step SD, when the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended, an end process is executed (step SE). In the termination process, the control unit 140 turns off the power supply of the imaging device 10 by stopping the power supply from the battery 110. When the imaging device 10 is operating in the communication mode, in the end process, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to disconnect the communication connection with the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 disconnects the communication connection with the communication device 20.
 図4は、ステップSAにおける起動処理の手順を示す。図4を参照して起動処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 4 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA. With reference to FIG. 4, the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the activation process will be described.
 電源ボタン152が電源オンの指示を受け付けたとき、バッテリー110から制御部140に電力が供給されることにより、制御部140は動作を開始する。制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSA10)。 When the power button 152 receives a power-on instruction, power is supplied from the battery 110 to the control unit 140, whereby the control unit 140 starts operation. The controller 140 reads the first remaining battery level B1 from the memory 120 (step SA10).
 ステップSA10の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であるか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1に基づいて、撮像装置10の起動時の動作モードを判断する(ステップSA11)。第1のバッテリー残量B1が0である場合、撮像装置10は通信モードで動作することができない。第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でない場合、撮像装置10は通信モードで動作することができる。 After step SA10, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines an operation mode when the imaging device 10 is activated based on the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SA11). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the communication mode.
 ステップSA11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、スタンドアロン撮影モードで撮像装置10を起動する。また、制御部140は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる(ステップSA12)。 In Step SA11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the stand-alone shooting mode. Further, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 120 (step SA12).
 ステップSA11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、通信モードで撮像装置10を起動する。また、制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に確立させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20と通信できる。また、制御部140は、通信モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる(ステップSA13)。ステップSA12またはステップSA13における処理が実行されることにより、起動処理が終了する。 In step SA11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the communication mode. In addition, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication device 130 can communicate with the communication device 20. Also, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the communication mode in the memory 120 (step SA13). When the process in step SA12 or step SA13 is executed, the activation process ends.
 起動処理において、制御部140は、所定の動作モードで撮像装置10を起動することを示す起動指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信してもよい。例えば、所定の動作モードは、ユーザによって指定された動作モードである。起動指示が受信された後、制御部140は、起動指示が示す動作モードで撮像装置10を起動する。 In the activation process, the control unit 140 may receive an activation instruction indicating that the imaging device 10 is activated in a predetermined operation mode from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. For example, the predetermined operation mode is an operation mode designated by the user. After the activation instruction is received, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the activation instruction.
 メモリ120は、前回の使用において設定された動作モードを示す過去モード情報を記憶してもよい。起動処理において、制御部140は、過去モード情報が示す動作モードで撮像装置10を起動してもよい。 The memory 120 may store past mode information indicating the operation mode set in the previous use. In the activation process, the control unit 140 may activate the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the past mode information.
 メモリ120は、使用予定である動作モードを示す予定モード情報を記憶してもよい。起動処理において、制御部140は、予定モード情報が示す動作モードで撮像装置10を起動してもよい。 The memory 120 may store schedule mode information indicating an operation mode scheduled to be used. In the activation process, the control unit 140 may activate the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the schedule mode information.
 起動処理において、ユーザインターフェース150は、動作モードの指示をユーザから受け付けてもよい。起動処理において、制御部140は、ユーザインターフェース150を介した操作により指示された動作モードで撮像装置10を起動してもよい。 In the activation process, the user interface 150 may accept an operation mode instruction from the user. In the activation process, the control unit 140 may activate the imaging device 10 in an operation mode instructed by an operation via the user interface 150.
 図5は、ステップSBにおける動作モード管理処理の手順を示す。図5を参照して動作モード管理処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 5 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SB. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the operation mode management process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSB10)。 The control unit 140 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120 (step SB10).
 ステップSB10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部140が判断した場合、動作モード管理処理が終了する。ステップSB10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSB11)。 In step SB10, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the communication mode, the operation mode management process ends. In step SB10, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SB11).
 ステップSB11の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であるか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えるか否かを判断する。これにより、制御部140は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する(ステップSB12)。第1のバッテリー残量B1が0である場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断する。第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でない場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できると判断する。 After step SB11, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the first battery remaining amount B1. Thereby, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode (step SB12). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode.
 ステップSB12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でないと制御部140が判断した場合、動作モード管理処理が終了する。ステップSB12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替える。これにより、撮像装置10の動作モードはスタンドアロン撮影モードに変更される。このとき、制御部140は、メモリ120に保存された設定モード情報を更新する。更新された設定モード情報は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す(ステップSB13)。 In step SB12, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the operation mode management process ends. In step SB12, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. Thereby, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed to the stand-alone shooting mode. At this time, the control unit 140 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. The updated setting mode information indicates the stand-alone shooting mode (step SB13).
 ステップSB13の後、制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に切断させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20との通信接続を切断する(ステップSB14)。ステップSB14における処理が実行されることにより、動作モード管理処理が終了する。 After step SB13, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to disconnect the communication connection with the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 disconnects the communication connection with the communication device 20 (step SB14). When the process in step SB14 is executed, the operation mode management process ends.
 第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であることにより撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替わったとき、バッテリー110の全体の残量が0でなければ、撮像装置10はスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作することができる。 When the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched to the stand-alone shooting mode because the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the imaging device 10 operates in the stand-alone shooting mode if the entire remaining amount of the battery 110 is not zero. can do.
 例えば、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替わった後、撮像装置10は撮像を実行する。通信によりバッテリー110の残量が低下した場合であっても、撮像装置10が撮像を実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 For example, after the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched to the stand-alone imaging mode, the imaging apparatus 10 performs imaging. Even when the remaining amount of the battery 110 is reduced due to communication, it is difficult for the imaging device 10 to perform imaging.
 撮像装置10の動作モードが第1の動作モードすなわち通信モードから第2の動作モードすなわちスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替わった後、制御部140は撮像装置10の電源をオフにしてもよい。例えば、ステップSB13の後、制御部140は、メモリ120に保存されたフラグの値を、撮像装置10の使用が終了したことを示す値に更新する。その後、図3に示すステップSDにおいて、撮像装置10の使用が終了したと制御部140が判断し、かつステップSEにおいて終了処理が実行される。 After the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the first operation mode, that is, the communication mode, to the second operation mode, that is, the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. For example, after step SB13, the control unit 140 updates the value of the flag stored in the memory 120 to a value indicating that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended. Thereafter, in step SD shown in FIG. 3, the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended, and the end process is executed in step SE.
 撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は撮像装置10の電源をオフにしてもよい。撮像装置10の電源がオフになった後、撮像装置10の電源がオフからオンになったとき、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えてもよい。例えば、ステップSB12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す予定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる。予定モード情報が記憶された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替えることなく撮像装置10の電源をオフにする。その後、起動処理において、制御部140は、予定モード情報が示すスタンドアロン撮影モードで撮像装置10を起動する。 When the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. When the imaging apparatus 10 is turned off and then on after the imaging apparatus 10 is turned off, the control unit 140 changes the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. You may switch. For example, when the control unit 140 determines in step SB12 that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 140 stores the scheduled mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 120. After the scheduled mode information is stored, the control unit 140 turns off the power of the imaging device 10 without switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. Thereafter, in the activation process, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the stand-alone imaging mode indicated by the schedule mode information.
 通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、動作モードの切替をユーザに通知してもよい。例えば、ステップSB12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す切替モード情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、切替モード情報が示すスタンドアロン撮影モードに撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることを示すメッセージを表示する。切替モード情報が送信された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替える。 The display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of switching of the operation mode. For example, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0 in step SB12, the control unit 140 transmits switching mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. . The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a message indicating that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched to the stand-alone shooting mode indicated by the switching mode information. After the switching mode information is transmitted, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode.
 動作モードの切替がユーザに通知された後、動作モードの切替を許可するか否かをユーザが決定してもよい。例えば、通信装置20は、ユーザインターフェースを有する。通信装置20のユーザインターフェースは、動作モードの切替を許可する切替許可指示と、動作モードの切替を禁止する切替禁止指示とのいずれか1つを受け付ける。通信装置20は、切替許可指示または切替禁止指示を示す制御コマンドを撮像装置10に送信する。制御部140は、その制御コマンドを通信機130によって受信する。受信された制御コマンドが切替許可指示である場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替える。受信された制御コマンドが切替禁止指示である場合、撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることなく動作モード管理処理が終了する。 After the operation mode switch is notified to the user, the user may determine whether or not to allow the operation mode switch. For example, the communication device 20 has a user interface. The user interface of the communication device 20 receives either one of a switch permission instruction for permitting switching of the operation mode and a switch prohibition instruction for prohibiting switching of the operation mode. The communication device 20 transmits a control command indicating a switching permission instruction or a switching prohibition instruction to the imaging device 10. The control unit 140 receives the control command by the communication device 130. When the received control command is a switching permission instruction, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. When the received control command is a switching prohibition instruction, the operation mode management process ends without switching the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10.
 図6は、ステップSCにおけるコマンド処理の手順を示す。図6を参照してコマンド処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 6 shows a command processing procedure in step SC. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部140は、制御コマンドが受け付けられたか否かを判断する(ステップSC10)。通信装置20から送信された制御コマンドが受信された場合、または制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース150によって受け付けられた場合、制御部140は、制御コマンドが受け付けられたと判断する。通信装置20から送信された制御コマンドが受信されず、かつ制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース150によって受け付けられていない場合、制御部140は、制御コマンドが受け付けられていないと判断する。 Control unit 140 determines whether or not a control command has been accepted (step SC10). When the control command transmitted from the communication device 20 is received or when the control command is received by the user interface 150, the control unit 140 determines that the control command has been received. When the control command transmitted from the communication device 20 is not received and the control command is not accepted by the user interface 150, the control unit 140 determines that the control command is not accepted.
 ステップSC10において、制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース150によって受け付けられていないと制御部140が判断した場合、コマンド処理が終了する。ステップSC10において、制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース150によって受け付けられたと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、制御コマンドに応じた処理を実行する(ステップSC11)。 In step SC10, when the control unit 140 determines that the control command is not accepted by the user interface 150, the command processing ends. In step SC10, when the control unit 140 determines that the control command has been accepted by the user interface 150, the control unit 140 executes processing according to the control command (step SC11).
 制御部140は、制御コマンドとして、動作モードの切替を示す切替指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信してもよい。制御部140は、受信された切替指示に基づいて撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替える。例えば、切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えることを示す。制御部140は、その切替指示に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替える。撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作しているとき、撮像装置10は通信装置20と通信を行わない。このため、撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作しているとき、撮像装置10は切替指示を通信装置20から受信しない。 The control unit 140 may receive a switching instruction indicating switching of the operation mode from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130 as a control command. The control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 based on the received switching instruction. For example, the switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. Based on the switching instruction, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode. When the imaging device 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 does not communicate with the communication device 20. For this reason, when the imaging device 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 does not receive a switching instruction from the communication device 20.
 ステップSC11の後、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSC12)。 After step SC11, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120 (step SC12).
 ステップSC12において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部140が判断した場合、コマンド処理が終了する。ステップSC12において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。具体的には、制御部140は、通信モードにおけるバッテリー110の使用量に応じて第1のバッテリー残量B1を減らす(ステップSC13)。ステップSC13における処理が実行されることにより、コマンド処理が終了する。 In step SC12, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the communication mode, the command processing ends. In step SC <b> 12, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B <b> 1 stored in the memory 120. Specifically, the control unit 140 reduces the first battery remaining amount B1 according to the usage amount of the battery 110 in the communication mode (step SC13). By executing the process in step SC13, the command process ends.
 図7は、バッテリー110が充電されるときに実行される残量更新処理の手順を示す。図7を参照して残量更新処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 7 shows a procedure of remaining amount update processing executed when the battery 110 is charged. The operation of the imaging device 10 in the remaining amount update process will be described with reference to FIG.
 撮像装置10がオフであり、かつ給電装置に接続された電源ケーブルが撮像装置10に接続されているとき、給電装置から給電が行われる。給電装置からの給電により、バッテリー110が充電される。 When the imaging device 10 is off and a power cable connected to the power feeding device is connected to the imaging device 10, power feeding is performed from the power feeding device. The battery 110 is charged by the power supply from the power supply apparatus.
 給電装置からの給電が開始されたとき、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSF10)。ステップSF10の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しいか否かを判断する(ステップSF11)。 When the power supply from the power supply apparatus is started, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SF10). After step SF10, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity (step SF11).
 ステップSF11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しいと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF10における処理が実行される。ステップSF11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しくないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。具体的には、制御部140は、バッテリー110の充電量に応じて、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。つまり、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やす(ステップSF12)。 In step SF11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity, the process in step SF10 is executed. In step SF11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not equal to the first battery capacity, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120. . Specifically, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120 in accordance with the charge amount of the battery 110. That is, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF12).
 ステップSF12の後、制御部140は、給電が停止されたか否かを判断する(ステップSF13)。ステップSF13において、給電が停止されていないと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF10における処理が実行される。ステップSF13において、給電が停止されたと制御部140が判断した場合、残量更新処理が終了する。 After step SF12, the control unit 140 determines whether power supply is stopped (step SF13). In step SF13, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF10 is executed. In step SF13, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
 第1の実施形態における撮像モード制御方法は、第1のステップ(ステップSB12)および第2のステップ(ステップSB13)を有する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、撮像装置10において、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する(第1のステップ)。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、撮像装置10において、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える(第2のステップ)。本発明の各態様の撮像モード制御方法は、上記の第1および第2のステップ以外のステップを有していなくてもよい。 The imaging mode control method in the first embodiment has a first step (step SB12) and a second step (step SB13). When the imaging device 10 is operating in the first operation mode, in the imaging device 10, the control unit 140 can continue the operation of the imaging device 10 in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Whether or not (first step). When it is determined that the imaging apparatus 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, in the imaging apparatus 10, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. (Second step). The imaging mode control method of each aspect of the present invention may not include steps other than the first and second steps described above.
 第1の実施形態において、撮像装置10の動作モードが第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替わったとき、第2の動作モードにおける動作に必要なバッテリー残量が確保されている可能性が高い。このため、撮像装置10が第2の動作モードで動作する可能性が高まりやすい。つまり、通信時のバッテリー残量の低下により撮像が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 In the first embodiment, when the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, there is a possibility that the remaining battery capacity necessary for the operation in the second operation mode is secured. Is expensive. For this reason, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates in the second operation mode is likely to increase. That is, a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication is less likely to occur.
 (第1の実施形態の変形例)
 本発明の第1の実施形態の変形例において、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、設定情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。設定情報は、撮像装置10が第2の動作モードで動作しているときに撮像装置10に設定される内容を示す。設定情報が受信された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える。第1の実施形態の変形例における第1の動作モードは、パラメータ設定モードである。
(Modification of the first embodiment)
In the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, when the control unit 140 determines that the imaging apparatus 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 transmits the setting information to the communication device 130 via the communication device 130. 20 is received. The setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device 10 when the imaging device 10 is operating in the second operation mode. After the setting information is received, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. The first operation mode in the modification of the first embodiment is a parameter setting mode.
 図8は、第1の実施形態の変形例における動作モード管理処理の手順を示す。図8に示す処理について、図5に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 8 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in the modification of the first embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 8 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 メモリ120は、所定値L1を記憶する。所定値L1は、パラメータ設定モードにおける動作に最低限必要なバッテリー容量を示す。ステップSB11の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さいか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えるか否かを判断する。これにより、制御部140は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する(ステップSB20)。第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さい場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断する。第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1以上である場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できると判断する。 The memory 120 stores a predetermined value L1. The predetermined value L1 indicates the minimum battery capacity required for operation in the parameter setting mode. After step SB11, control unit 140 determines whether or not first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than predetermined value L1. That is, the control unit 140 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the first battery remaining amount B1. Thereby, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode (step SB20). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode.
 ステップSB20において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1以上であると制御部140が判断した場合、動作モード管理処理が終了する。ステップSB20において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、パラメータ設定のための制御情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する(ステップSB21)。ステップSB21において受信される制御情報は、パラメータ設定指示および設定情報を含む。ステップSB21において受信される設定情報は、第2の動作モードにおけるパラメータである。例えば、設定情報は、スタンドアロン撮影モードにおける撮像パラメータである。 In step SB20, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the operation mode management process ends. In step SB20, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 140 receives control information for parameter setting from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. (Step SB21). The control information received in step SB21 includes a parameter setting instruction and setting information. The setting information received in step SB21 is a parameter in the second operation mode. For example, the setting information is an imaging parameter in the stand-alone imaging mode.
 ステップSB21の後、制御部140は、制御情報に含まれる設定情報をメモリ120に記憶させる。これにより、制御部140は、撮像装置10の設定を変更する(ステップSB22)。ステップSB22の後、ステップSB13における処理が行われる。ステップSB22およびステップSB13における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。また、ステップSB14における処理が実行された後にステップSB22における処理が実行されてもよい。 After step SB21, the control unit 140 stores the setting information included in the control information in the memory 120. Thereby, the control part 140 changes the setting of the imaging device 10 (step SB22). After step SB22, the process at step SB13 is performed. The order of processing in step SB22 and step SB13 may be switched. Further, the process in step SB22 may be executed after the process in step SB14 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図8に示す処理は、図5に示す処理と同様である。 For the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 8 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図8に示す処理において、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、設定情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する(ステップSB21)。設定情報が受信された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える(ステップSB22)。 In the process illustrated in FIG. 8, when the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 receives the setting information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130 (Step S1). SB21). After the setting information is received, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode (step SB22).
 通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、撮像装置10の設定変更をユーザに通知してもよい。例えば、ステップSB20において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の設定変更を示す設定変更情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、設定変更情報に基づいて、設定情報の受付を示すメッセージを表示する。 The display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of a setting change of the imaging device 10. For example, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1 in step SB20, the control unit 140 transmits setting change information indicating a setting change of the imaging device 10 to the communication device 130. Transmit to the communication device 20. The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a message indicating acceptance of the setting information based on the setting change information.
 例えば、通信装置20は、ユーザインターフェースを有する。通信装置20のユーザインターフェースは、設定情報の変更を受け付ける。通信装置20は、パラメータ設定指示と、変更された設定情報とを含む制御情報を撮像装置10に送信する。ステップSB21において、制御部140は、その制御情報を通信機130によって受信する。 For example, the communication device 20 has a user interface. The user interface of the communication device 20 receives a change in setting information. The communication device 20 transmits control information including the parameter setting instruction and the changed setting information to the imaging device 10. In step SB21, the control unit 140 receives the control information by the communication device 130.
 通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、前述した動作と同様の動作により、動作モードの切替をユーザに通知してもよい。動作モードの切替がユーザに通知された後、動作モードの切替を許可するか否かをユーザが決定してもよい。 The display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of the switching of the operation mode by the same operation as described above. After the user is notified of the switching of the operation mode, the user may determine whether to permit the switching of the operation mode.
 第1の実施形態の変形例において、第1の動作モードにおける動作により第1のバッテリー残量が少なくなったとき、撮像装置10は設定情報を受信する。設定情報が受信された後、撮像装置10の動作モードが第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替わる。このため、撮像装置10の動作モードが変更される前に、撮像装置10は第2の動作モードに使用される設定情報を受信し、かつ設定情報に基づく設定を行うことができる。 In the modification of the first embodiment, the imaging device 10 receives the setting information when the first battery remaining amount is reduced by the operation in the first operation mode. After the setting information is received, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. For this reason, before the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed, the imaging device 10 can receive the setting information used for the second operation mode and perform setting based on the setting information.
 (第2の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第2の実施形態を説明する。第2の実施形態において、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量に加えて、バッテリー110の全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。第2のバッテリー残量は、第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量である。第2のバッテリー残量は、第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される。
(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the second embodiment, the memory 120 stores a second battery remaining amount that is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110 in addition to the first battery remaining amount. The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode. The second battery remaining amount is updated based on the operation in the second operation mode.
 また、メモリ120は、第2のバッテリー容量を記憶する。第2のバッテリー容量は、第2の動作モードに割り当てられるバッテリー容量である。第2のバッテリー容量は、0よりも大きく、かつバッテリー110の全体の容量よりも小さい。第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量の合計は、バッテリー110の全体の容量よりも小さい、またはバッテリー110の全体の容量と等しい。第2の動作モードにおける撮像装置10の動作により、バッテリー容量は減少する。第2のバッテリー残量は、第2のバッテリー容量から第2の動作モードにおける動作により減少した容量を除いた残りの容量である。第2のバッテリー残量は、バッテリー110の全体の容量または第2のバッテリー容量に対する比率(%)で表されてもよい。バッテリー110が物理的に2つのバッテリーに分かれている必要はない。 Also, the memory 120 stores the second battery capacity. The second battery capacity is a battery capacity assigned to the second operation mode. The second battery capacity is larger than 0 and smaller than the entire capacity of the battery 110. The sum of the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity is less than or equal to the total capacity of the battery 110. The battery capacity decreases due to the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the second operation mode. The second battery remaining capacity is a remaining capacity obtained by subtracting the capacity reduced by the operation in the second operation mode from the second battery capacity. The second battery remaining amount may be represented by the total capacity of the battery 110 or a ratio (%) to the second battery capacity. The battery 110 need not be physically divided into two batteries.
 撮像装置10が第2の動作モードで動作しているとき、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、撮像装置10が第2の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する。撮像装置10が第2の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第2の動作モードから第1の動作モードに切り替える。 When the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the second operation mode, the control unit 140 determines whether the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the second operation mode based on the second remaining battery level. To do. When the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the second operation mode, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the second operation mode to the first operation mode.
 撮像装置10に設定できる複数の動作モードは、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードと異なる第3の動作モードを含んでもよい。複数の動作モードは、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのみであってもよい。第1のバッテリー残量は第1の動作モードでのみ使用でき、かつ第2のバッテリー残量は第2の動作モードでのみ使用できてもよい。 The plurality of operation modes that can be set in the imaging apparatus 10 may include a third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode. The plurality of operation modes may be only the first operation mode and the second operation mode. The first battery remaining amount may be used only in the first operation mode, and the second battery remaining amount may be used only in the second operation mode.
 バッテリー110の充電中、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量を第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。つまり、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量が第2のバッテリー残量よりも平均的に大きくなるように第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を更新する。 During charging of the battery 110, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. That is, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount so that the first battery remaining amount is larger than the second battery remaining amount on average.
 第2の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図3に示す手順で動作する。図9は、ステップSAにおける起動処理の手順を示す。図9に示す処理について、図4に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 The imaging device 10 of the second embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 9 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA. The process shown in FIG. 9 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSA11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSA20)。 In Step SA11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 140 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (Step SA20).
 ステップSA20の後、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であるか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2に基づいて、撮像装置10の起動時の動作モードを判断する(ステップSA21)。第2のバッテリー残量B2が0である場合、撮像装置10はスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作することができない。第2のバッテリー残量B2が0でない場合、撮像装置10はスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作することができる。 After step SA20, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the second battery remaining amount B2 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines an operation mode when the imaging device 10 is activated based on the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SA21). When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the stand-alone shooting mode. When the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the stand-alone shooting mode.
 ステップSA21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSA13における処理が実行される。ステップSA21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0でないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、任意の動作モードで撮像装置10を起動する。その動作モードにおける動作が通信を含む場合、制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に確立させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20と通信できる。また、制御部140は、起動時の動作モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる(ステップSA22)。ステップSA12、ステップSA13、およびステップSA22のいずれか1つにおける処理が実行されることにより、起動処理が終了する。 In step SA21, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the process in step SA13 is executed. In step SA21, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in an arbitrary operation mode. When the operation in the operation mode includes communication, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication device 130 can communicate with the communication device 20. In addition, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the operation mode at the time of activation in the memory 120 (step SA22). When the process in any one of step SA12, step SA13, and step SA22 is executed, the activation process ends.
 上記以外の点について、図9に示す処理は、図4に示す処理と同様である。 For the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 9 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図10は、ステップSBにおける動作モード管理処理の手順を示す。図10に示す処理について、図5に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 10 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SB. The process shown in FIG. 10 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSB10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSB30)。 In step SB10, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is stand-alone shooting based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. It is determined whether or not the mode is selected (step SB30).
 ステップSB30において、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードでないと制御部140が判断した場合、動作モード管理処理が終了する。ステップSB30において、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードであると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSB31)。 In step SB30, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the stand-alone shooting mode, the operation mode management process ends. In step SB30, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 140 reads the second remaining battery charge B2 from the memory 120 (step SB31).
 ステップSB31の後、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であるか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードをスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替えるか否かを判断する。これにより、制御部140は、撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する(ステップSB32)。第2のバッテリー残量B2が0である場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断する。第2のバッテリー残量B2が0でない場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードにおける動作を継続できると判断する。 After step SB31, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the second battery remaining amount B2 is zero. That is, the control unit 140 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode based on the second battery remaining amount B2. Thereby, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the stand-alone shooting mode (step SB32). When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the stand-alone shooting mode. When the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the control unit 140 determines that the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the stand-alone shooting mode.
 ステップSB32において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0でないと制御部140が判断した場合、動作モード管理処理が終了する。ステップSB32において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードをスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替える。これにより、撮像装置10の動作モードは通信モードに変更される。このとき、制御部140は、メモリ120に保存された設定モード情報を更新する。更新された設定モード情報は、通信モードを示す。また、制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に確立させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20と通信できる(ステップSB33)。ステップSB33における処理が実行されることにより、動作モード管理処理が終了する。 In step SB32, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the operation mode management process ends. In step SB32, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode. Thereby, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed to the communication mode. At this time, the control unit 140 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. The updated setting mode information indicates the communication mode. In addition, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication apparatus 130 can communicate with the communication apparatus 20 (step SB33). When the process in step SB33 is executed, the operation mode management process ends.
 上記以外の点について、図10に示す処理は、図5に示す処理と同様である。 Regarding the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 10 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であることにより撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードに切り替わったとき、バッテリー110の全体の残量が0でなければ。このため、撮像装置10は通信モードで動作することができる。 When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0 and the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched to the communication mode, the entire remaining amount of the battery 110 is not zero. For this reason, the imaging device 10 can operate in the communication mode.
 撮像装置10の動作モードが第2の動作モードすなわちスタンドアロン撮影モードから第1の動作モードすなわち通信モードに切り替わった後、制御部140は撮像装置10の電源をオフにしてもよい。例えば、ステップSB33の後、制御部140は、メモリ120に保存されたフラグの値を、撮像装置10の使用が終了したことを示す値に更新する。その後、図3に示すステップSDにおいて、撮像装置10の使用が終了したと制御部140が判断し、かつステップSEにおいて終了処理が実行される。 After the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the second operation mode, that is, the stand-alone shooting mode, to the first operation mode, that is, the communication mode, the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging apparatus 10. For example, after step SB33, the control unit 140 updates the value of the flag stored in the memory 120 to a value indicating that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended. Thereafter, in step SD shown in FIG. 3, the control unit 140 determines that the use of the imaging device 10 has ended, and the end process is executed in step SE.
 撮像装置10が第2の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は撮像装置10の電源をオフにしてもよい。撮像装置10の電源がオフになった後、撮像装置10の電源がオフからオンになったとき、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第2の動作モードから第1の動作モードに切り替えてもよい。例えば、ステップSB32において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、通信モードを示す予定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる。予定モード情報が記憶された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替えることなく撮像装置10の電源をオフにする。その後、起動処理において、制御部140は、予定モード情報が示す通信モードで撮像装置10を起動する。 When the control unit 140 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the second operation mode, the control unit 140 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. When the imaging apparatus 10 is turned off and then on after the imaging apparatus 10 is turned off, the control unit 140 changes the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the second operation mode to the first operation mode. You may switch. For example, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0 in step SB32, the control unit 140 stores the scheduled mode information indicating the communication mode in the memory 120. After the scheduled mode information is stored, the control unit 140 turns off the power of the imaging device 10 without switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. Thereafter, in the activation process, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the communication mode indicated by the schedule mode information.
 通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、動作モードの切替をユーザに通知してもよい。例えば、ステップSB32において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、通信モードを示す切替モード情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20のディスプレイ240は、切替モード情報が示す通信モードに撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることを示すメッセージを表示する。切替モード情報が送信された後、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードをスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替える。 The display 240 of the communication device 20 may notify the user of switching of the operation mode. For example, when the control unit 140 determines in step SB32 that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the control unit 140 transmits the switching mode information indicating the communication mode to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The display 240 of the communication device 20 displays a message indicating that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched to the communication mode indicated by the switching mode information. After the switching mode information is transmitted, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode.
 動作モードの切替がユーザに通知された後、動作モードの切替を許可するか否かをユーザが決定してもよい。例えば、通信装置20は、ユーザインターフェースを有する。通信装置20のユーザインターフェースは、動作モードの切替を許可する切替許可指示と、動作モードの切替を禁止する切替禁止指示とのいずれか1つを受け付ける。通信装置20は、切替許可指示または切替禁止指示を示す制御コマンドを撮像装置10に送信する。制御部140は、その制御コマンドを通信機130によって受信する。受信された制御コマンドが切替許可指示である場合、制御部140は、撮像装置10の動作モードをスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替える。受信された制御コマンドが切替禁止指示である場合、撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることなく動作モード管理処理が終了する。 After the operation mode switch is notified to the user, the user may determine whether or not to allow the operation mode switch. For example, the communication device 20 has a user interface. The user interface of the communication device 20 receives either one of a switch permission instruction for permitting switching of the operation mode and a switch prohibition instruction for prohibiting switching of the operation mode. The communication device 20 transmits a control command indicating a switching permission instruction or a switching prohibition instruction to the imaging device 10. The control unit 140 receives the control command by the communication device 130. When the received control command is a switching permission instruction, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode. When the received control command is a switching prohibition instruction, the operation mode management process ends without switching the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10.
 図11は、ステップSCにおけるコマンド処理の手順を示す。図11に示す処理について、図6に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 11 shows a command processing procedure in step SC. The process shown in FIG. 11 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSC12において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSC20)。 In step SC12, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is stand-alone imaging based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120. It is determined whether or not the mode is selected (step SC20).
 ステップSC20において、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードでないと制御部140が判断した場合、コマンド処理が終了する。ステップSC20において、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードであると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。具体的には、制御部140は、スタンドアロン撮影モードにおけるバッテリー110の使用量に応じて第2のバッテリー残量B2を減らす(ステップSC21)。ステップSC21における処理が実行されることにより、コマンド処理が終了する。 In step SC20, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the stand-alone shooting mode, the command processing ends. In step SC <b> 20, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B <b> 2 stored in the memory 120. Specifically, the control unit 140 reduces the second battery remaining amount B2 according to the usage amount of the battery 110 in the stand-alone shooting mode (step SC21). By executing the processing in step SC21, the command processing ends.
 上記以外の点について、図11に示す処理は、図6に示す処理と同様である。 11 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 6 for points other than the above.
 図12は、バッテリー110が充電されるときに実行される残量更新処理の手順を示す。図12に示す処理について、図7に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 12 shows the procedure of the remaining amount update process executed when the battery 110 is charged. The process shown in FIG. 12 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSF11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSF20)。ステップSF20の後、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2が第2のバッテリー容量と等しいか否かを判断する(ステップSF21)。 In step SF11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity, the control unit 140 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (step SF20). After step SF20, control unit 140 determines whether or not second battery remaining amount B2 is equal to the second battery capacity (step SF21).
 ステップSF21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が第2のバッテリー容量と等しいと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF23における処理が実行される。ステップSF21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が第2のバッテリー容量と等しくないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。具体的には、制御部140は、バッテリー110の充電量に応じて、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。つまり、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やす(ステップSF22)。 In step SF21, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is equal to the second battery capacity, the process in step SF23 is executed. In step SF21, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not equal to the second battery capacity, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120. . Specifically, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B <b> 2 stored in the memory 120 according to the charge amount of the battery 110. That is, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF22).
 ステップSF22の後、制御部140は、給電が停止されたか否かを判断する(ステップSF23)。ステップSF23において、給電が停止されていないと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF20における処理が実行される。ステップSF23において、給電が停止されたと制御部140が判断した場合、残量更新処理が終了する。 After step SF22, the control unit 140 determines whether power feeding is stopped (step SF23). In step SF23, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF20 is executed. In step SF23, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
 上記以外の点について、図12に示す処理は、図7に示す処理と同様である。 Regarding the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 12 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量よりも少なく、かつ第2のバッテリー残量B2が第2のバッテリー容量よりも少ない場合がある。この場合、図11に示す処理により、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しくなるまで、第1のバッテリー残量B1が更新される。第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しくなるまで、第2のバッテリー残量B2は更新されない。第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しくなった後、第2のバッテリー残量B2が更新される。したがって、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量B1を第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも優先して増やす。 There are cases where the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the first battery capacity and the second battery remaining amount B2 is smaller than the second battery capacity. In this case, the first battery remaining amount B1 is updated by the process shown in FIG. 11 until the first battery remaining amount B1 becomes equal to the first battery capacity. The second battery remaining amount B2 is not updated until the first battery remaining amount B1 becomes equal to the first battery capacity. After the first battery remaining amount B1 becomes equal to the first battery capacity, the second battery remaining amount B2 is updated. Therefore, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in preference to the second battery remaining amount B2 as the remaining amount of the battery 110 increases.
 第2の実施形態において、第1および第2の動作モードの各々においてバッテリー残量が管理される。撮像装置10が第1または第2の動作モードにおける動作を継続することができない場合であっても、撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることにより、撮像装置10が動作する可能性が高まりやすい。つまり、撮像装置10に設定された動作モードにおけるバッテリー残量の低下により他の動作モードにおける処理が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 In the second embodiment, the remaining battery level is managed in each of the first and second operation modes. Even when the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first or second operation mode, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates is likely to increase by switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. That is, a state in which processing in another operation mode cannot be performed is less likely to occur due to a decrease in the remaining battery level in the operation mode set in the imaging apparatus 10.
 バッテリー110の充電中に第1のバッテリー残量が第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先的に増える。これにより、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続しやすい。 During the charging of the battery 110, the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
 (第2の実施形態の第1の変形例)
 図13は、本発明の第2の実施形態の第1の変形例における残量更新処理の手順を示す。図13に示す処理について、図12に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。
(First Modification of Second Embodiment)
FIG. 13 shows a procedure of remaining amount update processing in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. The process shown in FIG. 13 is different from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSF11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しくないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第1の所定時間におけるバッテリー残量の変化に基づいて、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。例えば、ステップSF11における処理が実行されたタイミングから第1の所定時間が経過するまでにバッテリー110の全体の残量がΔV増加した場合、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をΔV増やす(ステップSF30)。ステップSF30の後、ステップSF13における処理が実行される。 In step SF11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not equal to the first battery capacity, the control unit 140 stores the memory based on the change in the remaining battery amount during the first predetermined time. The first battery remaining amount B1 stored in 120 is updated. For example, when the total remaining amount of the battery 110 increases by ΔV from the timing when the processing in step SF11 is performed until the first predetermined time elapses, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 by ΔV. (Step SF30). After step SF30, the process in step SF13 is executed.
 ステップSF11において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第1のバッテリー容量と等しいと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF13における処理が実行される。ステップSF13において、給電が停止されていないと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF20における処理が実行される。ステップSF13において、給電が停止されたと制御部140が判断した場合、残量更新処理が終了する。 In step SF11, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to the first battery capacity, the process in step SF13 is executed. In step SF13, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF20 is executed. In step SF13, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
 ステップSF21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が第2のバッテリー容量と等しくないと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2の所定時間におけるバッテリー残量の変化に基づいて、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。例えば、ステップSF21における処理が実行されたタイミングから第2の所定時間が経過するまでにバッテリー110の全体の残量がΔV増加した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をΔV増やす(ステップSF31)。ステップSF31の後、ステップSF23における処理が実行される。 In step SF21, when the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not equal to the second battery capacity, the control unit 140 stores the memory based on the change in the remaining battery amount during the second predetermined time. The second battery remaining amount B2 stored in 120 is updated. For example, when the total remaining amount of the battery 110 increases by ΔV from the timing when the process in step SF21 is executed until the second predetermined time has elapsed, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 by ΔV. (Step SF31). After step SF31, the process in step SF23 is executed.
 ステップSF23において、給電が停止されていないと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF10における処理が実行される。ステップSF23において、給電が停止されたと制御部140が判断した場合、残量更新処理が終了する。 In step SF23, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF10 is executed. In step SF23, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
 第2の所定時間は、第1の所定時間と同一である。あるいは、第2の所定時間は、第1の所定時間と異なる。例えば、第2の所定時間は第1の所定時間よりも短い。 The second predetermined time is the same as the first predetermined time. Alternatively, the second predetermined time is different from the first predetermined time. For example, the second predetermined time is shorter than the first predetermined time.
 上記以外の点について、図13に示す処理は、図12に示す処理と同様である。 Regarding the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 13 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図13に示す残量更新処理において、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を交互に更新する。これにより、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量を第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。 In the remaining amount update process shown in FIG. 13, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 alternately. Thereby, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount.
 第2の実施形態の第1の変形例において、バッテリー110の充電中に第1のバッテリー残量が第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先的に増える。これにより、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続しやすい。 In the first modification of the second embodiment, the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
 (第2の実施形態の第2の変形例)
 図14は、本発明の第2の実施形態の第2の変形例における通信装置20の構成を示す。図14に示すように、通信装置20は、メモリ200、通信機210(第1の通信機)、制御部220(第1の制御部)、ユーザインターフェース230、およびディスプレイ240を有する。
(Second modification of the second embodiment)
FIG. 14 shows the configuration of the communication device 20 in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 14, the communication device 20 includes a memory 200, a communication device 210 (first communication device), a control unit 220 (first control unit), a user interface 230, and a display 240.
 メモリ200は、揮発性または不揮発性のメモリである。例えば、メモリ200は、RAM、DRAM、SRAM、ROM、EPROM、EEPROM、およびフラッシュメモリの少なくとも1つである。メモリ200は、通信機210によって受信された画像データを記憶する。 The memory 200 is a volatile or non-volatile memory. For example, the memory 200 is at least one of RAM, DRAM, SRAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, and flash memory. The memory 200 stores image data received by the communication device 210.
 通信機210は、無線モジュールであり、かつ図14に示していないアンテナを介して撮像装置10と無線通信を行う。撮像装置10および通信装置20がケーブルで接続され、かつ通信機210はケーブルを介して撮像装置10と通信を行ってもよい。 The communication device 210 is a wireless module and performs wireless communication with the imaging device 10 via an antenna not shown in FIG. The imaging device 10 and the communication device 20 may be connected by a cable, and the communication device 210 may communicate with the imaging device 10 via the cable.
 制御部220は、コントローラである。制御部220は、プロセッサおよび論理回路の少なくとも1つで構成されている。制御部220は、1つまたは複数のプロセッサを含むことができる。制御部220は、1つまたは複数の論理回路を含むことができる。制御部220は、通信装置20の状態に基づいて制御を実行する。 The control unit 220 is a controller. The control unit 220 includes at least one of a processor and a logic circuit. The controller 220 can include one or more processors. The controller 220 can include one or more logic circuits. The control unit 220 executes control based on the state of the communication device 20.
 制御部220は、制御部220の動作を規定する命令を含むプログラムを読み込み、かつ読み込まれたプログラムを実行してもよい。つまり、制御部220の機能はソフトウェアにより実現されてもよい。このプログラムの実現形態は、図2に示す制御部140の機能を実現するプログラムの実現形態と同様である。 The control unit 220 may read a program including an instruction that defines the operation of the control unit 220 and may execute the read program. That is, the function of the control unit 220 may be realized by software. The implementation form of this program is the same as the implementation form of the program that implements the functions of the control unit 140 shown in FIG.
 制御部220は、情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。具体的には、制御部220は、情報が撮像装置10に送信されるように通信機210を制御する。つまり、制御部220は、撮像装置10に対する情報を通信機210に送信させる。これによって、通信機210は、情報を撮像装置10に送信する。制御部220は、画像データまたは情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。具体的には、制御部220は、画像データまたは情報が撮像装置10から受信されるように通信機210を制御する。つまり、制御部220は、撮像装置10から送信された画像データまたは情報を通信機210に受信させる。これによって、通信機210は、画像データまたは情報を撮像装置10から受信する。 The control unit 220 transmits information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Specifically, the control unit 220 controls the communication device 210 so that information is transmitted to the imaging device 10. That is, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to transmit information regarding the imaging device 10. Thereby, the communication device 210 transmits information to the imaging device 10. The control unit 220 receives image data or information from the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Specifically, the control unit 220 controls the communication device 210 so that image data or information is received from the imaging device 10. That is, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to receive the image data or information transmitted from the imaging device 10. Accordingly, the communication device 210 receives image data or information from the imaging device 10.
 ユーザインターフェース230は、操作部であり、かつ制御コマンドに対応する指示をユーザから受け付ける。例えば、ユーザインターフェース230は、ボタン、スイッチ、キー、およびタッチパネルの少なくとも1つである。例えば、ユーザインターフェース230は、制御コマンドおよび設定情報の指示をユーザから受け付ける。 The user interface 230 is an operation unit and receives an instruction corresponding to the control command from the user. For example, the user interface 230 is at least one of a button, a switch, a key, and a touch panel. For example, the user interface 230 receives control command and setting information instructions from the user.
 ディスプレイ240は、表示部であり、かつメモリ200に記憶された画像データを表示する。例えば、ディスプレイ240は、液晶ディスプレイおよび有機EL(Electro Luminescence)ディスプレイの少なくとも1つである。ディスプレイ240は、タッチパネルディスプレイであってもよい。その場合、ユーザインターフェース230およびディスプレイ240は一体化される。通信装置20が有するバッテリーは図14に示されていない。 The display 240 is a display unit and displays image data stored in the memory 200. For example, the display 240 is at least one of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display. The display 240 may be a touch panel display. In that case, the user interface 230 and the display 240 are integrated. The battery included in the communication device 20 is not shown in FIG.
 撮像装置10において、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20において、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。制御部220は、受信された第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量をディスプレイ240に表示させる。ディスプレイ240は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を表示する。 In the imaging device 10, the control unit 140 transmits the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount stored in the memory 120 to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. In the communication device 20, the control unit 220 receives the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210. The control unit 220 causes the display 240 to display the received first battery remaining amount and second battery remaining amount. The display 240 displays the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
 ユーザは、表示された第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替えてもよい。例えば、撮像装置10が通信モードおよびスタンドアロン撮影モードのうちバッテリー残量がより少ない動作モードで動作している場合、ユーザは、撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替えてもよい。ユーザは、ユーザインターフェース150を介して動作モードの切替指示を入力する。ユーザインターフェース150は、切替指示をユーザから受け付ける。制御部220は、切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。撮像装置10において、制御部140は、切替指示を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。制御部140は、受信された切替指示に基づいて撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替える。 The user may switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 based on the displayed first battery remaining amount and second battery remaining amount. For example, when the imaging device 10 is operating in an operation mode in which the remaining battery level is lower among the communication mode and the stand-alone shooting mode, the user may switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10. The user inputs an operation mode switching instruction via the user interface 150. The user interface 150 receives a switching instruction from the user. The control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. In the imaging device 10, the control unit 140 receives a switching instruction from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 based on the received switching instruction.
 図15および図16は、ディスプレイ240の画面241を示す。図15は、バッテリー残量表示画面を示す。図15に示すように、マークM10およびマークM11が画面241に表示される。マークM10は、第1のバッテリー残量を示す。マークM10の形状は、第1のバッテリー残量に応じて変化する。マークM11は、第2のバッテリー残量を示す。マークM11の形状は、第2のバッテリー残量に応じて変化する。図16は、バッテリー容量設定画面を示す。図16に示すように、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量の比R10が表示される。図16に示す例では、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量の比は、3:1である。 15 and 16 show a screen 241 of the display 240. FIG. FIG. 15 shows a battery remaining amount display screen. As shown in FIG. 15, the mark M <b> 10 and the mark M <b> 11 are displayed on the screen 241. A mark M10 indicates the first remaining battery level. The shape of the mark M10 changes according to the first remaining battery level. The mark M11 indicates the second remaining battery level. The shape of the mark M11 changes according to the second battery remaining amount. FIG. 16 shows a battery capacity setting screen. As shown in FIG. 16, the ratio R10 of the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity is 3: 1.
 ユーザは、ユーザインターフェース150を介して第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量の比を指定する。ユーザインターフェース150は、ユーザによって指定された比を受け付ける。制御部220は、バッテリー容量の設定指示と、ユーザによって指定された比を示す設定情報とを含む制御情報を生成する。制御部220は、制御情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。撮像装置10において、制御部140は、制御情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。制御部140は、受信された制御情報が示す比に基づいて第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量をメモリ120に設定する。 The user designates the ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity via the user interface 150. The user interface 150 accepts a ratio specified by the user. The control unit 220 generates control information including a battery capacity setting instruction and setting information indicating a ratio designated by the user. The control unit 220 transmits control information to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. In the imaging device 10, the control unit 140 receives control information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The controller 140 sets the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity in the memory 120 based on the ratio indicated by the received control information.
 第2の実施形態の第2の変形例において、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量がディスプレイ240に表示される。これにより、ユーザは、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を確認することができる。ユーザは、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に応じて撮像装置10の動作モードを切り替えることができる。 In the second modification of the second embodiment, the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount are displayed on the display 240. Thereby, the user can confirm the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. The user can switch the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 according to the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
 ユーザインターフェース150は、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量の比を受け付ける。制御部220は、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量の比を示す制御情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。これにより、ユーザは、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量を撮像装置10に設定することができる。 The user interface 150 receives a ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity. The control unit 220 transmits control information indicating the ratio between the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Thereby, the user can set the first battery capacity and the second battery capacity in the imaging apparatus 10.
 (第3の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第3の実施形態を説明する。第3の実施形態において、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データの数をカウントする。制御部140は、カウントされた画像データの数に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。第1のバッテリー残量を増やすと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量を増やす。
(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the third embodiment, the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. The control unit 140 counts the number of image data generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. The control unit 140 determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the counted number of image data. When the control unit 140 determines to increase the first battery remaining amount, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount.
 メモリ120は、未転送画像数を記憶する。未転送画像数は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成され、かつ通信装置20に転送されていない画像データの数である。未転送画像数は、0以上の整数である。イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより画像データが生成されたとき、未転送画像数が1増える。メモリ120に記憶された画像データが通信装置20に転送されたとき、未転送画像数が1減る。制御部140は、未転送画像数に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。第3の実施形態における第1の動作モードは、画像転送モードである。 The memory 120 stores the number of untransferred images. The number of untransferred images is the number of image data that is generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging and is not transferred to the communication device 20. The number of untransferred images is an integer of 0 or more. When image data is generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging, the number of untransferred images increases by one. When the image data stored in the memory 120 is transferred to the communication device 20, the number of untransferred images is reduced by one. The control unit 140 determines whether or not to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of untransferred images. The first operation mode in the third embodiment is an image transfer mode.
 図17は、撮像装置10の動作の手順を示す。図17に示す処理について、図3に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 17 shows an operation procedure of the imaging apparatus 10. The processing shown in FIG. 17 will be described while referring to differences from the processing shown in FIG.
 ステップSCの後、電源管理処理が実行される(ステップSG)。電源管理処理により、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量が調整される。ステップSGの後、ステップSDにおける処理が実行される。 After step SC, power management processing is executed (step SG). The first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount are adjusted by the power management process. After step SG, the process in step SD is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図17に示す処理は、図3に示す処理と同様である。 For the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 17 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図18は、ステップSGにおける電源管理処理の手順を示す。図18を参照して電源管理処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 18 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部140は、未転送画像数Ctをメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG40)。ステップSG40の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG41)。ステップSG40およびステップSG41における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。 The control unit 140 reads the untransferred image count Ct from the memory 120 (step SG40). After step SG40, control unit 140 reads first battery remaining amount B1 from memory 120 (step SG41). The order of processing in step SG40 and step SG41 may be switched.
 ステップSG41の後、制御部140は、通信機130がCt枚の画像を転送するために必要なバッテリー容量BCtを算出する。例えば、通信機130が1枚の画像を転送するために必要なバッテリー容量Bは所定値であり、かつメモリ120に記憶されている。制御部140は、バッテリー容量Bに未転送画像数Ctを乗じることにより、バッテリー容量BCtを算出する(ステップSG42)。 After step SG41, the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCt necessary for the communication device 130 to transfer Ct images. For example, the battery capacity B necessary for the communication device 130 to transfer one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120. The control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCt by multiplying the battery capacity B by the number of untransferred images Ct (step SG42).
 ステップSG42の後、制御部140は、バッテリー容量BCtが第1のバッテリー残量B1よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSG43)。バッテリー容量BCtが第1のバッテリー残量B1よりも大きい場合、第1のバッテリー残量B1は、Ct枚の画像の転送に十分でない。バッテリー容量BCtが第1のバッテリー残量B1以下である場合、第1のバッテリー残量B1は、Ct枚の画像の転送に十分である。 After step SG42, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the battery capacity BCt is larger than the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SG43). When the battery capacity BCt is larger than the first battery remaining amount B1, the first battery remaining amount B1 is not sufficient for transferring Ct images. When the battery capacity BCt is equal to or less than the first battery remaining amount B1, the first battery remaining amount B1 is sufficient for transferring Ct images.
 ステップSG43において、バッテリー容量BCtが第1のバッテリー残量B1以下であると制御部140が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSG43において、バッテリー容量BCtが第1のバッテリー残量B1よりも大きいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG44)。 In step SG43, when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCt is equal to or less than the first battery remaining amount B1, the power management process ends. In step SG43, when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCt is larger than the first battery remaining amount B1, the control unit 140 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (step SG44).
 ステップSG44の後、制御部140は、バッテリー容量BCtから第1のバッテリー残量B1を減算した値(BCt-B1)を算出する。値(BCt-B1)は、Ct枚の画像の転送に不足するバッテリー容量である。制御部140は、値(BCt-B1)が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも小さいか否かを判断する(ステップSG45)。値(BCt-B1)が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも小さい場合、Ct枚の画像の転送に不足するバッテリー容量を第2のバッテリー残量B2で埋め合わせることができる。値(BCt-B1)が第2のバッテリー残量B2以上である場合、Ct枚の画像の転送に不足するバッテリー容量を第2のバッテリー残量B2で埋め合わせることができない。 After step SG44, the control unit 140 calculates a value (BCt−B1) obtained by subtracting the first battery remaining amount B1 from the battery capacity BCt. The value (BCt−B1) is a battery capacity that is insufficient for transferring Ct images. The controller 140 determines whether or not the value (BCt−B1) is smaller than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SG45). When the value (BCt−B1) is smaller than the second battery remaining amount B2, the battery capacity that is insufficient for transferring Ct images can be compensated by the second battery remaining amount B2. When the value (BCt−B1) is equal to or greater than the second battery remaining amount B2, the battery capacity that is insufficient for transferring Ct images cannot be compensated by the second battery remaining amount B2.
 ステップSG45において、値(BCt-B1)が第2のバッテリー残量B2以上であると制御部140が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSG45において、値(BCt-B1)が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも小さいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2を値(BCt-B1)だけ減らす。さらに、制御部140は、値(BCt-B1)を、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1に加算することにより、第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する(ステップSG46)。ステップSG46における処理が実行されることにより、電源管理処理が終了する。 In step SG45, when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCt−B1) is equal to or greater than the second battery remaining amount B2, the power management process ends. In Step SG45, when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCt−B1) is smaller than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 sets the second battery remaining amount B2 to the value (BCt−B1). cut back. Further, the control unit 140 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 by adding the value (BCt−B1) to the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120 (step SG46). By executing the process in step SG46, the power management process ends.
 図18に示す処理において、制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データの数(未転送画像数Ct)に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やすか否かを判断する(ステップSG43)。第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やすと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やす(ステップSG46)。撮像装置10が画像転送モードで動作しているときのみ、図18に示す処理が実行されてもよい。 In the process illustrated in FIG. 18, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 based on the number of image data (the number of untransferred images Ct) generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. It is determined whether or not (step SG43). When the control unit 140 determines to increase the first battery remaining amount B1, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SG46). The process shown in FIG. 18 may be executed only when the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the image transfer mode.
 第3の実施形態において、第1のバッテリー残量が画像の転送に十分でない場合、制御部140は第1のバッテリー残量を増やす。これにより、撮像装置10は、画像の転送に必要な第1のバッテリー残量を確保することができる。 In the third embodiment, when the first battery remaining amount is not sufficient for image transfer, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can ensure the first remaining battery level necessary for image transfer.
 (第4の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第4の実施形態を説明する。第4の実施形態において、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数に基づいて、第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。第2のバッテリー残量を増やすと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量を増やす。
(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. The control unit 140 determines whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. When the control unit 140 determines that the second battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount.
 メモリ120は、撮影予定枚数を記憶する。撮影予定枚数は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数である。撮影予定枚数は、1以上の整数である。イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより画像データが生成されたとき、撮影予定枚数が1減る。制御部140は、撮影予定枚数に基づいて、第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。 The memory 120 stores the scheduled number of shots. The scheduled number of images is the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. The planned number of shots is an integer of 1 or more. When image data is generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging, the scheduled number of images is reduced by one. The control unit 140 determines whether to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the scheduled number of shots.
 第4の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図17に示す手順で動作する。図19は、ステップSGにおける電源管理処理の手順を示す。図19を参照して電源管理処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 The imaging apparatus 10 according to the fourth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 19 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The operation of the imaging device 10 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部140は、撮影予定枚数Csをメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG50)。ステップSG50の後、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG51)。ステップSG50およびステップSG51における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。 The control unit 140 reads the scheduled number of images Cs from the memory 120 (step SG50). After step SG50, control unit 140 reads second battery remaining amount B2 from memory 120 (step SG51). The order of processing in step SG50 and step SG51 may be switched.
 ステップSG51の後、制御部140は、イメージセンサ100がCs枚の画像を撮影するために必要なバッテリー容量BCsを算出する。例えば、イメージセンサ100が1枚の画像を撮影するために必要なバッテリー容量Bは所定値であり、かつメモリ120に記憶されている。制御部140は、バッテリー容量Bに撮影予定枚数Csを乗じることにより、バッテリー容量BCsを算出する(ステップSG52)。 After step SG51, the control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCs necessary for the image sensor 100 to capture Cs images. For example, the battery capacity B necessary for the image sensor 100 to capture one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120. The control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCs by multiplying the battery capacity B by the scheduled number of shots Cs (step SG52).
 ステップSG52の後、制御部140は、バッテリー容量BCsが第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSG53)。バッテリー容量BCsが第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きい場合、第2のバッテリー残量B2は、Cs枚の画像の撮影に十分でない。バッテリー容量BCsが第2のバッテリー残量B2以下である場合、第2のバッテリー残量B2は、Cs枚の画像の撮影に十分である。 After step SG52, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the battery capacity BCs is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SG53). When the battery capacity BCs is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the second battery remaining amount B2 is not sufficient for capturing Cs images. When the battery capacity BCs is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the second battery remaining amount B2 is sufficient for capturing Cs images.
 ステップSG53において、バッテリー容量BCsが第2のバッテリー残量B2以下であると制御部140が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSG53において、バッテリー容量BCsが第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG54)。 In step SG53, when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCs is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the power management process ends. In step SG53, when the control unit 140 determines that the battery capacity BCs is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SG54).
 ステップSG54の後、制御部140は、バッテリー容量BCsから第2のバッテリー残量B2を減算した値(BCs-B2)を算出する。値(BCs-B2)は、Cs枚の画像の撮影に不足するバッテリー容量である。制御部140は、値(BCs-B2)が第1のバッテリー残量B1よりも小さいか否かを判断する(ステップSG55)。値(BCs-B2)が第1のバッテリー残量B1よりも小さい場合、Cs枚の画像の撮影に不足するバッテリー容量を第1のバッテリー残量B1で埋め合わせることができる。値(BCs-B2)が第1のバッテリー残量B1以上である場合、Cs枚の画像の撮影に不足するバッテリー容量を第1のバッテリー残量B1で埋め合わせることができない。 After step SG54, the control unit 140 calculates a value (BCs−B2) obtained by subtracting the second battery remaining amount B2 from the battery capacity BCs. The value (BCs−B2) is a battery capacity that is insufficient to capture Cs images. The controller 140 determines whether or not the value (BCs−B2) is smaller than the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SG55). When the value (BCs−B2) is smaller than the first battery remaining amount B1, the battery capacity that is insufficient to capture Cs images can be compensated by the first battery remaining amount B1. When the value (BCs−B2) is equal to or greater than the first battery remaining amount B1, the battery capacity that is insufficient to capture Cs images cannot be compensated by the first battery remaining amount B1.
 ステップSG55において、値(BCs-B2)が第1のバッテリー残量B1以上であると制御部140が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSG55において、値(BCs-B2)が第1のバッテリー残量B1よりも小さいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1を値(BCs-B2)だけ減らす。さらに、制御部140は、値(BCs-B2)を、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2に加算することにより、第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する(ステップSG56)。ステップSG56における処理が実行されることにより、電源管理処理が終了する。 In step SG55, when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCs−B2) is equal to or greater than the first battery remaining amount B1, the power management process ends. In step SG55, when the control unit 140 determines that the value (BCs−B2) is smaller than the first battery remaining amount B1, the control unit 140 sets the first battery remaining amount B1 by the value (BCs−B2). cut back. Further, the control unit 140 updates the second battery remaining amount B2 by adding the value (BCs−B2) to the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120 (step SG56). By executing the process in step SG56, the power management process ends.
 図19に示す処理において、制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数(撮影予定枚数Cs)に基づいて、第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やすか否かを判断する(ステップSG53)。第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やすと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やす(ステップSG56)。撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作しているときのみ、図19に示す処理が実行されてもよい。 In the process illustrated in FIG. 19, the control unit 140 calculates the second battery remaining amount B <b> 2 based on the number of image data (scheduled shooting number Cs) that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging. It is determined whether or not to increase (step SG53). When the control unit 140 determines to increase the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SG56). The process illustrated in FIG. 19 may be executed only when the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode.
 第4の実施形態において、第2のバッテリー残量が画像の撮影に十分でない場合、制御部140は第2のバッテリー残量を増やす。これにより、撮像装置10は、画像の撮影に必要な第2のバッテリー残量を確保することができる。前述したように、スタンドアロン撮影モードでは、リモート撮影モードと比較して、撮像装置10は、より多くの画像データを取得することができる。このため、撮像装置10は、撮影予定枚数の画像データをより確実に取得することができる。 In the fourth embodiment, when the second battery remaining amount is not sufficient for capturing an image, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can secure the second battery remaining amount necessary for capturing an image. As described above, in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 can acquire more image data than in the remote shooting mode. For this reason, the imaging device 10 can acquire the image data of the scheduled number of images more reliably.
 (第5の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第5の実施形態を説明する。第5の実施形態において、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する。バッテリー110の充電中、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。
(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. The control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. While the battery 110 is being charged, the control unit 140 changes the remaining battery level determined to increase preferentially among the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount according to the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. Increase over the remaining battery power.
 図20は、バッテリー110が充電されるときに実行される残量更新処理の手順を示す。図20を参照して残量更新処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 20 shows the procedure of the remaining amount update process executed when the battery 110 is charged. The operation of the imaging device 10 in the remaining amount update process will be described with reference to FIG.
 給電装置からの給電が開始されたとき、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSF40)。ステップSF40の後、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSF41)。ステップSF40およびステップSF41における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。ステップSF41の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSF42)。 When the power supply from the power supply apparatus is started, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SF40). After step SF40, control unit 140 reads second battery remaining amount B2 from memory 120 (step SF41). The order of processing in step SF40 and step SF41 may be switched. After step SF41, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SF42).
 ステップSF42において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きいと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。具体的には、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やす(ステップSF43)。 In Step SF42, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 uses the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120. Update. Specifically, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF43).
 ステップSF42において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第2のバッテリー残量B2以下であると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。具体的には、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やす(ステップSF44)。 In step SF42, when the control unit 140 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 uses the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120. Update. Specifically, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 (step SF44).
 ステップSF43またはステップSF44の後、制御部140は、給電が停止されたか否かを判断する(ステップSF45)。ステップSF45において、給電が停止されていないと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF40における処理が実行される。ステップSF45において、給電が停止されたと制御部140が判断した場合、残量更新処理が終了する。 After step SF43 or step SF44, the control unit 140 determines whether power feeding is stopped (step SF45). In step SF45, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply is not stopped, the process in step SF40 is executed. In step SF45, when the control unit 140 determines that the power supply has been stopped, the remaining amount update process ends.
 図20に示す処理において、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する(ステップSF42)。制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす(ステップSF43およびステップSF44)。 In the process shown in FIG. 20, the control unit 140 prioritizes increasing the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Is determined (step SF42). The controller 140 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (steps SF43 and SF44). .
 第5の実施形態において、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、優先して増やすバッテリー残量を決定する。その結果、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち、より少ないバッテリー残量が優先される。これにより、撮像装置10は、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのどちらにおいても動作することができる。 In the fifth embodiment, the control unit 140 determines a battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. As a result, priority is given to a smaller battery remaining amount of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
 (第5の実施形態の第1の変形例)
 第5の実施形態の第1の変形例において、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量、第2のバッテリー残量、第1のバッテリー容量、および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶する。制御部140は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する。第1の比率は、第1のバッテリー容量に対する第1のバッテリー残量の比率である。第2の比率は、第2のバッテリー容量に対する第2のバッテリー残量の比率である。
(First Modification of Fifth Embodiment)
In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the memory 120 stores a first battery remaining amount, a second battery remaining amount, a first battery capacity, and a second battery capacity. Based on the first ratio and the second ratio, the control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased. The first ratio is a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity. The second ratio is a ratio of the second remaining battery capacity to the second battery capacity.
 図21は、バッテリー110が充電されるときに実行される残量更新処理の手順を示す。図21に示す処理について、図20に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 21 shows the remaining amount update process executed when the battery 110 is charged. The process shown in FIG. 21 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSF41の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー容量に対する第1のバッテリー残量B1の第1の比率P1を算出する(ステップSF50)。ステップSF50の後、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー容量に対する第2のバッテリー残量B2の第2の比率P2を算出する(ステップSF51)。ステップSF50およびステップSF51における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。ステップSF51の後、制御部140は、第1の比率P1が第2の比率P2よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSF52)。 After step SF41, the control unit 140 calculates a first ratio P1 of the first battery remaining amount B1 with respect to the first battery capacity (step SF50). After step SF50, the control unit 140 calculates a second ratio P2 of the second battery remaining amount B2 with respect to the second battery capacity (step SF51). The order of processing in step SF50 and step SF51 may be switched. After step SF51, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first ratio P1 is greater than the second ratio P2 (step SF52).
 ステップSF52において、第1の比率P1が第2の比率P2よりも大きいと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF43における処理が実行される。ステップSF52において、第1の比率P1が第2の比率P2以下であると制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF44における処理が実行される。 In step SF52, when the control unit 140 determines that the first ratio P1 is larger than the second ratio P2, the process in step SF43 is executed. In step SF52, when the control unit 140 determines that the first ratio P1 is equal to or less than the second ratio P2, the process in step SF44 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図21に示す処理は、図20に示す処理と同様である。 For the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 21 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図21に示す処理において、制御部140は、第1の比率P1および第2の比率P2に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する(ステップSF52)。制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす(ステップSF43およびステップSF44)。 In the process shown in FIG. 21, the control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio P1 and the second ratio P2. (Step SF52). The controller 140 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (steps SF43 and SF44). .
 第5の実施形態の第1の変形例において、制御部140は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、優先して増やすバッテリー残量を決定する。その結果、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち、各動作モードに割り当てられたバッテリー容量に対する比率がより少ないバッテリー残量が優先される。これにより、撮像装置10は、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのどちらにおいても動作することができる。 In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the control unit 140 determines the battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio. As a result, priority is given to a battery remaining amount having a smaller ratio to the battery capacity allocated to each operation mode out of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
 (第5の実施形態の第2の変形例)
 第5の実施形態の第2の変形例において、メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。さらに、メモリ120は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの第1の数を記憶する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データの第2の数をカウントする。制御部140は、第1の数に相当する画像データが通信装置20に送信された後の第1のバッテリー残量の第1の推定値を算出する。制御部140は、第2の数に相当する撮像がイメージセンサ100によって実行された後の第2のバッテリー残量の第2の推定値を算出する。制御部140は、第1の推定値および第2の推定値に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する。第5の実施形態の第2の変形例における第1の動作モードは、画像転送モードである。
(Second Modification of Fifth Embodiment)
In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the memory 120 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Furthermore, the memory 120 stores a first number of image data that is to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. When the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 counts the second number of image data generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging. The control unit 140 calculates a first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number is transmitted to the communication device 20. The control unit 140 calculates a second estimated value of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number. Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be prioritized and increased. The first operation mode in the second modification of the fifth embodiment is an image transfer mode.
 図22は、バッテリー110が充電されるときに実行される残量更新処理の手順を示す。図22に示す処理について、図20に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 22 shows a procedure of remaining amount update processing executed when the battery 110 is charged. The process shown in FIG. 22 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSF41の後、制御部140は、撮影予定枚数Csをメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSF60)。ステップSF60の後、制御部140は、未転送画像数Ctをメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSF61)。ステップSF60およびステップSF61における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。 After step SF41, the control unit 140 reads the scheduled number of shots Cs from the memory 120 (step SF60). After step SF60, the control unit 140 reads the number of untransferred images Ct from the memory 120 (step SF61). The order of processing in step SF60 and step SF61 may be switched.
 ステップSF61の後、制御部140は、イメージセンサ100がCs枚の画像を撮影することにより第2のバッテリー残量B2が減った後の第2の推定残量B2’を算出する。例えば、1枚の画像を撮影するために必要なバッテリー容量Bは所定値であり、かつメモリ120に記憶されている。制御部140は、バッテリー容量Bに撮影予定枚数Csを乗じることにより、バッテリー容量BCsを算出する。さらに、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2からバッテリー容量BCsを減算することにより、第2の推定残量B2’を算出する(ステップSF62)。 After step SF61, the control unit 140 calculates the second estimated remaining amount B2 'after the second battery remaining amount B2 is reduced by the image sensor 100 taking Cs images. For example, the battery capacity B necessary for taking one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120. The control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCs by multiplying the battery capacity B by the scheduled number of images Cs. Further, the control unit 140 calculates the second estimated remaining amount B2 'by subtracting the battery capacity BCs from the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SF62).
 ステップSF62の後、制御部140は、通信機130がCt枚の画像を転送することにより第1のバッテリー残量B1が減った後の第1の推定残量B1’を算出する。例えば、1枚の画像を転送するために必要なバッテリー容量Bは所定値であり、かつメモリ120に記憶されている。制御部140は、バッテリー容量Bに未転送画像数Ctを乗じることにより、バッテリー容量BCtを算出する。さらに、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1からバッテリー容量BCtを減算することにより、第1の推定残量B1’を算出する(ステップSF63)。 After step SF62, the control unit 140 calculates the first estimated remaining amount B1 'after the first battery remaining amount B1 is reduced by the communication device 130 transferring Ct images. For example, the battery capacity B necessary for transferring one image is a predetermined value and is stored in the memory 120. The control unit 140 calculates the battery capacity BCt by multiplying the battery capacity B by the number Ct of untransferred images. Furthermore, the control unit 140 calculates the first estimated remaining amount B1 'by subtracting the battery capacity BCt from the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SF63).
 ステップSF62およびステップSF63における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。ステップSF60およびステップSF62における処理は、ステップSF61における処理が実行される前に実行されてもよい。ステップSF61およびステップSF63における処理は、ステップSF60における処理が実行される前に実行されてもよい。 The order of processing in step SF62 and step SF63 may be switched. The processes in step SF60 and step SF62 may be executed before the process in step SF61 is executed. The processes in step SF61 and step SF63 may be performed before the process in step SF60 is performed.
 ステップSF63の後、制御部140は、第1の推定残量B1’が第2の推定残量B2’よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSF64)。ステップSF64において、第1の推定残量B1’が第2の推定残量B2’よりも大きいと制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF43における処理が実行される。ステップSF64において、第1の推定残量B1’が第2の推定残量B2’以下であると制御部140が判断した場合、ステップSF44における処理が実行される。 After step SF63, the control unit 140 determines whether or not the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is larger than the second estimated remaining amount B2' (step SF64). In step SF64, when the control unit 140 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is larger than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SF43 is executed. In step SF64, when the control unit 140 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is equal to or less than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SF44 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図22に示す処理は、図20に示す処理と同様である。 For the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 22 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図22に示す処理において、制御部140は、第1の数(未転送画像数Ct)に相当する画像データが通信装置20に送信された後の第1のバッテリー残量の第1の推定値(第1の推定残量B1’)を算出する(ステップSF63)。制御部140は、第2の数(撮影予定枚数Cs)に相当する撮像がイメージセンサ100によって実行された後の第2のバッテリー残量の第2の推定値(第2の推定残量B2’)を算出する(ステップSF62)。制御部140は、第1の推定値および第2の推定値に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する(ステップSF64)。制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす(ステップSF43およびステップSF44)。 In the process illustrated in FIG. 22, the control unit 140 includes a first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number (the number Ct of untransferred images) is transmitted to the communication device 20. (First estimated remaining amount B1 ′) is calculated (step SF63). The control unit 140 uses the second estimated value (second estimated remaining amount B2 ′) of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number (scheduled number of shots Cs). ) Is calculated (step SF62). Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, control unit 140 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased (step SF64). The controller 140 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (steps SF43 and SF44). .
 メモリ120は、撮像装置10が前回の第1の動作モードで動作した第1の時間と、撮像装置10が前回の第2の動作モードで動作した第2の時間とを記憶してもよい。制御部140は、第1の時間および第2の時間に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断してもよい。例えば、第1の時間が第2の時間よりも長い場合、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やす。また、第1の時間が第2の時間以下である場合、制御部140は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やす。 The memory 120 may store a first time when the imaging apparatus 10 operates in the previous first operation mode and a second time when the imaging apparatus 10 operates in the previous second operation mode. The controller 140 may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first time and the second time. For example, when the first time is longer than the second time, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. In addition, when the first time is equal to or shorter than the second time, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110.
 第5の実施形態の第2の変形例において、制御部140は、第1の推定残量B1’および第2の推定残量B2’に基づいて、優先して増やすバッテリー残量を決定する。その結果、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち、予定されている動作が行われた後に、より少なくなるバッテリー残量が優先される。これにより、撮像装置10は、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのどちらにおいても動作することができる。 In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the control unit 140 determines a battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first estimated remaining amount B1 'and the second estimated remaining amount B2'. As a result, of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount, priority is given to the remaining battery remaining amount after the scheduled operation is performed. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
 (第6の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第6の実施形態を説明する。撮像装置10の構成は図2に示され、かつ通信装置20の構成は図14に示される。第1から第5の実施形態において撮像装置10が動作モードの切替に関する判断を実行するが、第6の実施形態において通信装置20がその判断を実行する。通信装置20においてメモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量を記憶する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す。
(Sixth embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. The configuration of the imaging device 10 is shown in FIG. 2, and the configuration of the communication device 20 is shown in FIG. In the first to fifth embodiments, the imaging device 10 executes determination regarding switching of the operation mode. In the sixth embodiment, the communication device 20 performs the determination. In the communication device 20, the memory 200 stores the first remaining battery level. When the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit 220 determines whether the imaging apparatus 10 can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. To do. When the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.
 メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量に加えて、撮像装置10に設定された動作モードを記憶する。 The memory 200 stores the operation mode set in the imaging device 10 in addition to the first remaining battery level.
 リモート撮影モードにおいて、制御部220は、ライブ表示開始指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。ライブ表示開始指示が送信された後、撮像装置10においてライブ画像の撮像が実行される。制御部220は、イメージセンサ100が連続的に撮像を実行することにより生成された複数の画像データ(ライブ画像)を通信機210によって撮像装置10から順次受信する。ディスプレイ240は、撮像装置10から受信された画像データに基づいてライブ画像を表示する。ユーザはライブ画像に基づいて構図を確認し、かつユーザインターフェース230を介して撮影指示を入力する。ユーザインターフェース230は、撮影指示をユーザから受け付ける。制御部220は、撮影指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。 In the remote shooting mode, the control unit 220 transmits a live display start instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. After the live display start instruction is transmitted, the imaging device 10 captures a live image. The control unit 220 sequentially receives a plurality of image data (live images) generated by the image sensor 100 continuously performing imaging from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The display 240 displays a live image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10. The user confirms the composition based on the live image and inputs a shooting instruction via the user interface 230. The user interface 230 receives a shooting instruction from the user. The control unit 220 transmits a shooting instruction to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210.
 パラメータ設定モードにおいて、ユーザは、ユーザインターフェース230を介してパラメータ設定指示および設定情報を入力する。ユーザインターフェース230は、パラメータ設定指示および設定情報をユーザから受け付ける。制御部220は、パラメータ設定指示および設定情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。 In the parameter setting mode, the user inputs a parameter setting instruction and setting information via the user interface 230. The user interface 230 receives a parameter setting instruction and setting information from the user. The control unit 220 transmits a parameter setting instruction and setting information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210.
 画像転送モードにおいて、ユーザは、ユーザインターフェース230を介して画像転送指示を入力する。ユーザインターフェース230は、画像転送指示をユーザから受け付ける。制御部220は、画像転送指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。画像転送指示が送信された後、撮像装置10から画像データが送信される。制御部220は、画像データを通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。制御部220は、画像データをメモリ200に記憶させる。ディスプレイ240は、撮像装置10から受信された画像データに基づいて静止画または動画を表示する。 In the image transfer mode, the user inputs an image transfer instruction via the user interface 230. The user interface 230 receives an image transfer instruction from the user. The control unit 220 transmits an image transfer instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. After the image transfer instruction is transmitted, image data is transmitted from the imaging device 10. The control unit 220 receives image data from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The control unit 220 stores the image data in the memory 200. The display 240 displays a still image or a moving image based on the image data received from the imaging device 10.
 画像処理モードにおいて、ユーザは、ユーザインターフェース230を介して画像処理実行指示を入力する。ユーザインターフェース230は、画像処理実行指示をユーザから受け付ける。制御部220は、画像処理実行指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。あるいは、制御部220は、画像処理実行指示および画像付加情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。 In the image processing mode, the user inputs an image processing execution instruction via the user interface 230. The user interface 230 receives an image processing execution instruction from the user. The control unit 220 transmits an image processing execution instruction to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. Alternatively, the control unit 220 transmits an image processing execution instruction and image additional information to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
 図23は、撮像装置10の動作の手順を示す。図23に示す処理について、図3に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 23 shows an operation procedure of the imaging apparatus 10. The process shown in FIG. 23 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 図3に示す処理における動作モード管理処理(ステップSB)は実行されない。ステップSAの後、ステップSCにおける処理が実行される。 The operation mode management process (step SB) in the process shown in FIG. 3 is not executed. After step SA, the process in step SC is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図23に示す処理は、図3に示す処理と同様である。 For the points other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 23 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図24は、ステップSAにおける起動処理の手順を示す。図24を参照して起動処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 FIG. 24 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA. With reference to FIG. 24, the operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the activation process will be described.
 電源ボタン152が電源オンの指示を受け付けたとき、バッテリー110から制御部140に電力が供給されることにより、制御部140は動作を開始する。制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に確立させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20と通信できる(ステップSA30)。 When the power button 152 receives a power-on instruction, power is supplied from the battery 110 to the control unit 140, whereby the control unit 140 starts operation. The control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to establish a communication connection with the communication device 20. Thereby, the communication device 130 can communicate with the communication device 20 (step SA30).
 ステップSA30の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSA31)。ステップSA31の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1を示す第1の残量情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する(ステップSA32)。 After step SA30, the control unit 140 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 120 (step SA31). After step SA31, the control unit 140 transmits first remaining amount information indicating the first remaining battery amount B1 to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130 (step SA32).
 ステップSA32の後、制御部140は、動作モード設定のための起動モード情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する(ステップSA33)。通信装置20から受信される起動モード情報は、撮像装置10の起動時の動作モードを示す。 After step SA32, the control unit 140 receives the activation mode information for setting the operation mode from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130 (step SA33). The activation mode information received from the communication device 20 indicates an operation mode when the imaging device 10 is activated.
 ステップSA33の後、制御部140は、通信装置20から受信された起動モード情報が示す動作モードで撮像装置10を起動する。このとき、制御部140は、動作モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる。撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードで起動した場合、制御部140は、通信装置20との通信接続を通信機130に切断させる。これにより、通信機130は、通信装置20との通信接続を切断する(ステップSA34)。ステップSA34における処理が実行されることにより、起動処理が終了する。 After step SA33, the control unit 140 activates the imaging device 10 in the operation mode indicated by the activation mode information received from the communication device 20. At this time, the control unit 140 stores setting mode information indicating the operation mode in the memory 120. When the imaging device 10 is activated in the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 140 causes the communication device 130 to disconnect the communication connection with the communication device 20. As a result, the communication device 130 disconnects the communication connection with the communication device 20 (step SA34). When the process in step SA34 is executed, the activation process is terminated.
 第6の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図4に示す起動処理と同様の処理により、起動時の動作モードを決定してもよい。 The imaging apparatus 10 according to the sixth embodiment may determine the operation mode at the time of activation by a process similar to the activation process illustrated in FIG.
 図25は、ステップSCにおけるコマンド処理の手順を示す。図25に示す処理について、図6に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 25 shows the procedure of command processing in step SC. The process shown in FIG. 25 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSC13の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSC30)。ステップSC30の後、制御部140は、第1のバッテリー残量B1を示す第1の残量情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。これにより、制御部140は、更新された第1のバッテリー残量B1を通信装置20に通知する(ステップSC31)。ステップSC31における処理が実行されることにより、コマンド処理が終了する。 After step SC13, control unit 140 reads first battery remaining amount B1 from memory 120 (step SC30). After step SC30, control unit 140 transmits first remaining amount information indicating first battery remaining amount B1 to communication device 20 by communication device 130. Thereby, the control part 140 notifies the communication apparatus 20 of the updated 1st battery remaining charge B1 (step SC31). By executing the process in step SC31, the command process ends.
 上記以外の点について、図25に示す処理は、図6に示す処理と同様である。 25, the processing shown in FIG. 25 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.
 撮像装置10において、バッテリー110が充電されるとき、図7に示す残量更新処理が実行される。 In the imaging apparatus 10, when the battery 110 is charged, the remaining amount update process shown in FIG. 7 is executed.
 図26は、通信装置20の動作の手順を示す。図26を参照して通信装置20の動作を説明する。 FIG. 26 shows an operation procedure of the communication device 20. The operation of the communication device 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
 通信装置20の電源がオフであるとき、ユーザインターフェース230が電源オンの指示を受け付けることにより起動処理が実行される(ステップSH)。起動処理により、通信装置20が起動する。起動処理が実行された後、動作モード管理処理が実行される(ステップSI)。動作モード管理処理により、撮像装置10の動作モードが制御される。動作モード管理処理が実行された後、コマンド処理が実行される(ステップSJ)。コマンド処理により、制御コマンドに応じた処理が実行される。 When the power of the communication device 20 is off, the user interface 230 receives a power-on instruction to execute a start process (step SH). The communication device 20 is activated by the activation process. After the startup process is executed, an operation mode management process is executed (step SI). The operation mode of the imaging device 10 is controlled by the operation mode management process. After the operation mode management process is executed, a command process is executed (step SJ). Processing according to the control command is executed by command processing.
 コマンド処理が実行された後、制御部220は、通信装置20の使用が終了したか否かを判断する(ステップSK)。通信装置20の使用が終了したか否かを示すフラグがメモリ200に保存される。起動処理が実行されたとき、制御部220は、通信装置20が使用中であることを示す値を持つフラグをメモリ200に記憶させる。ユーザインターフェース230が電源オフの指示を受け付けたとき、制御部220は、メモリ200に保存されたフラグの値を、通信装置20の使用が終了したことを示す値に更新する。 After the command processing is executed, the control unit 220 determines whether or not the use of the communication device 20 is finished (step SK). A flag indicating whether or not the use of the communication device 20 has been completed is stored in the memory 200. When the activation process is executed, the control unit 220 causes the memory 200 to store a flag having a value indicating that the communication device 20 is in use. When the user interface 230 receives a power-off instruction, the control unit 220 updates the value of the flag stored in the memory 200 to a value indicating that the use of the communication device 20 has ended.
 ステップSKにおいて、通信装置20の使用が終了していないと制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSIにおける処理が実行される。通信装置20の使用が終了していない場合、ステップSIおよびステップSJにおける処理が繰り返し実行される。ステップSKにおいて、通信装置20の使用が終了したと制御部220が判断した場合、終了処理が実行される(ステップSL)。終了処理において、制御部220は、通信装置20のバッテリーからの電力供給を停止させることにより、通信装置20の電源をオフにする。撮像装置10が通信モードで動作している場合、終了処理において、制御部220は、電源オフ指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。その後、制御部220は、撮像装置10との通信接続を通信機210に切断させる。これにより、通信機210は、撮像装置10との通信接続を切断する。 In step SK, when the control unit 220 determines that the use of the communication device 20 has not ended, the processing in step SI is executed. If the use of the communication device 20 has not ended, the processes in step SI and step SJ are repeatedly executed. In step SK, when the control unit 220 determines that the use of the communication device 20 has ended, an end process is executed (step SL). In the termination process, the control unit 220 turns off the power supply of the communication device 20 by stopping the power supply from the battery of the communication device 20. When the imaging device 10 is operating in the communication mode, in the end process, the control unit 220 transmits a power-off instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. Thereafter, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to disconnect the communication connection with the imaging device 10. As a result, the communication device 210 disconnects the communication connection with the imaging device 10.
 図27は、ステップSHにおける起動処理の手順を示す。図27を参照して起動処理における通信装置20の動作を説明する。 FIG. 27 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SH. With reference to FIG. 27, the operation of the communication device 20 in the activation process will be described.
 ユーザインターフェース230が電源オンの指示を受け付けたとき、通信装置20のバッテリーから制御部220に電力が供給されることにより、制御部220は動作を開始する。制御部220は、撮像装置10との通信接続を通信機210に確立させる。これにより、通信機210は、撮像装置10と通信できる(ステップSH10)。 When the user interface 230 receives a power-on instruction, power is supplied from the battery of the communication device 20 to the control unit 220, so that the control unit 220 starts operation. The control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to establish a communication connection with the imaging device 10. Thereby, the communication device 210 can communicate with the imaging device 10 (step SH10).
 ステップSH10の後、制御部220は、第1の残量情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する(ステップSH11)。ステップSH11の後、制御部220は、第1の残量情報に基づいて、メモリ200に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。これにより、メモリ200に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1は、第1の残量情報が示す第1のバッテリー残量B1と同一になる(ステップSH12)。 After step SH10, the control unit 220 receives the first remaining amount information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SH11). After step SH11, the control unit 220 updates the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 based on the first remaining amount information. As a result, the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 becomes the same as the first battery remaining amount B1 indicated by the first remaining amount information (step SH12).
 ステップSH12の後、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ200から読み込む(ステップSH13)。ステップSH13の後、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であるか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1に基づいて、撮像装置10の起動時の動作モードを判断する(ステップSH14)。第1のバッテリー残量B1が0である場合、撮像装置10は通信モードで動作することができない。第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でない場合、撮像装置10は通信モードで動作することができる。 After step SH12, the control unit 220 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 200 (step SH13). After step SH13, control unit 220 determines whether or not first battery remaining amount B1 is zero. That is, the control unit 220 determines an operation mode when the imaging apparatus 10 is activated based on the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SH14). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the communication mode.
 ステップSH14において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ200に記憶させる(ステップSH15)。ステップSH15の後、制御部220は、スタンドアロン撮影モードで起動することを示す起動モード情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSH16)。この起動モード情報を受信した撮像装置10は、図24のステップSA34においてスタンドアロン撮影モードで起動する。 In step SH14, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 220 stores setting mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 200 (step SH15). After step SH15, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating activation in the stand-alone imaging mode to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SH16). The imaging apparatus 10 that has received the activation mode information is activated in the stand-alone imaging mode in step SA34 in FIG.
 ステップSH16の後、制御部220は、撮像装置10との通信接続を通信機210に切断させる。これにより、通信機210は、撮像装置10との通信接続を切断する(ステップSH17)。 After step SH16, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to disconnect the communication connection with the imaging device 10. Accordingly, the communication device 210 disconnects the communication connection with the imaging device 10 (step SH17).
 ステップSH14において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、通信モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ200に記憶させる(ステップSH18)。ステップSH18の後、制御部220は、通信モードで起動することを示す起動モード情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSH19)。この起動モード情報を受信した撮像装置10は、図24のステップSA34において通信モードで起動する。ステップSH17またはステップSH19における処理が実行されることにより、起動処理が終了する。 In step SH14, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 220 stores setting mode information indicating the communication mode in the memory 200 (step SH18). After step SH18, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating activation in the communication mode to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210 (step SH19). The imaging apparatus 10 that has received the activation mode information is activated in the communication mode in step SA34 in FIG. When the process in step SH17 or step SH19 is executed, the activation process ends.
 起動処理において、制御部220は、過去モード情報が示す動作モードで起動することを示す制御情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信してもよい。過去モード情報は、前回の使用において設定された動作モードを示す。 In the activation process, the control unit 220 may transmit control information indicating activation in the operation mode indicated by the past mode information to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The past mode information indicates the operation mode set in the previous use.
 起動処理において、制御部220は、予定モード情報が示す動作モードで起動することを示す制御情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信してもよい。予定モード情報は、使用予定である動作モードを示す。 In the activation process, the control unit 220 may transmit control information indicating activation in the operation mode indicated by the schedule mode information to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The scheduled mode information indicates an operation mode that is scheduled to be used.
 図28は、ステップSIにおける動作モード管理処理の手順を示す。図28を参照して動作モード管理処理における通信装置20の動作を説明する。 FIG. 28 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SI. The operation of the communication device 20 in the operation mode management process will be described with reference to FIG.
 ステップSI10からステップSI12の各々における処理は、処理主体を除いて、図5に示すステップSB10からステップSB12の各々における処理と同様である。ステップSI10からステップSI12の各々における処理主体は、制御部220である。 The processing in each of steps SI10 to SI12 is the same as the processing in each of steps SB10 to SB12 shown in FIG. The processing subject in each of steps SI10 to SI12 is control unit 220.
 ステップSI12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、メモリ200に保存された設定モード情報を更新する。更新された設定モード情報は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す(ステップSI13)。 In step SI12, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0, the control unit 220 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 200. The updated setting mode information indicates the stand-alone shooting mode (step SI13).
 ステップSI13の後、制御部220は、切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。この切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えることを示す(ステップSI14)。 After step SI13, the control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210. This switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode (step SI14).
 ステップSI14の後、制御部220は、撮像装置10との通信接続を通信機210に切断させる。これにより、通信機210は、撮像装置10との通信接続を切断する(ステップSI15)。ステップSI15における処理が実行されることにより、動作モード管理処理が終了する。 After step SI14, the control unit 220 causes the communication device 210 to disconnect the communication connection with the imaging device 10. As a result, the communication device 210 disconnects the communication connection with the imaging device 10 (step SI15). When the process in step SI15 is executed, the operation mode management process ends.
 撮像装置10の動作モードが第1の動作モードすなわち通信モードから第2の動作モードすなわちスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替わった後、制御部220は撮像装置10の電源をオフにさせてもよい。例えば、ステップSI14の後、制御部220は、電源オフ指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。 After the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the first operation mode, that is, the communication mode, to the second operation mode, that is, the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 220 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. For example, after step SI <b> 14, the control unit 220 transmits a power-off instruction to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
 撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は撮像装置10の電源をオフにさせてもよい。撮像装置10の電源がオフになった後、撮像装置10の電源がオフからオンになったとき、制御部220は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えてもよい。例えば、ステップSI12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、電源オフ指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。その後、撮像装置10が起動したとき、制御部220は、スタンドアロン撮影モードで起動することを示す起動モード情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。電源オフ指示が送信されるとき、制御部220は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す予定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信してもよい。 When the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 220 may turn off the power of the imaging device 10. When the imaging apparatus 10 is turned off and then on after the imaging apparatus 10 is turned off, the control unit 220 changes the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. You may switch. For example, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0 in step SI12, the control unit 220 transmits a power-off instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. Thereafter, when the imaging apparatus 10 is activated, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating that the imaging apparatus 10 is activated in the stand-alone imaging mode to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. When the power-off instruction is transmitted, the control unit 220 may transmit an instruction to store the schedule mode information indicating the stand-alone shooting mode in the memory 120 to the imaging apparatus 10 through the communication device 210.
 ディスプレイ240は、動作モードの切替をユーザに通知してもよい。例えば、ステップSI12において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0であると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、スタンドアロン撮影モードに撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることを示すメッセージをディスプレイ240に表示させる。メッセージが表示された後、制御部220は、切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。 The display 240 may notify the user of switching of the operation mode. For example, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is 0 in step SI12, the control unit 220 displays a message indicating that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched to the stand-alone shooting mode on the display 240. To display. After the message is displayed, the control unit 220 transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
 動作モードの切替がユーザに通知された後、動作モードの切替を許可するか否かをユーザが決定してもよい。例えば、ユーザインターフェース230は、動作モードの切替を許可する切替許可指示と、動作モードの切替を禁止する切替禁止指示とのいずれか1つを受け付ける。切替許可指示がユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられた場合、制御部220は、切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。切替禁止指示がユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられた場合、撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることなく動作モード管理処理が終了する。 After the operation mode switch is notified to the user, the user may determine whether or not to allow the operation mode switch. For example, the user interface 230 receives any one of a switch permission instruction for permitting switching of the operation mode and a switch prohibition instruction for prohibiting switching of the operation mode. When the switching permission instruction is received by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 transmits the switching instruction to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. When the switching prohibition instruction is received by the user interface 230, the operation mode management process ends without switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10.
 図29は、ステップSJにおけるコマンド処理の手順を示す。図29を参照してコマンド処理における通信装置20の動作を説明する。 FIG. 29 shows the command processing procedure in step SJ. The operation of the communication device 20 in command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部220は、制御コマンドが受け付けられたか否かを判断する(ステップSJ10)。制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられた場合、制御部220は、制御コマンドが受け付けられたと判断する。制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられていない場合、制御部220は、制御コマンドが受け付けられていないと判断する。 The control unit 220 determines whether or not a control command has been accepted (step SJ10). When the control command is received by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 determines that the control command has been received. When the control command is not accepted by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 determines that the control command is not accepted.
 ステップSJ10において、制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられていないと制御部220が判断した場合、コマンド処理が終了する。ステップSJ10において、制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられたと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、制御コマンドを通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSJ11)。 In step SJ10, when the control unit 220 determines that the control command is not accepted by the user interface 230, the command processing ends. In step SJ10, when the control unit 220 determines that the control command has been received by the user interface 230, the control unit 220 transmits the control command to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SJ11).
 撮像装置10から第1の残量情報が送信された場合、制御部220は、通信機210によって第1の残量情報を撮像装置10から受信する。ステップSJ11の後、制御部220は、第1の残量情報が受信されたか否かを判断する(ステップSJ12)。 When the first remaining amount information is transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the first remaining amount information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210. After step SJ11, control unit 220 determines whether or not the first remaining amount information has been received (step SJ12).
 ステップSJ12において、第1の残量情報が受信されていないと制御部220が判断した場合、コマンド処理が終了する。ステップSJ12において、第1の残量情報が受信されたと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、第1の残量情報に基づいて、メモリ200に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1を更新する。これにより、メモリ200に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1は、第1の残量情報が示す第1のバッテリー残量B1と同一になる(ステップSJ13)。ステップSJ13における処理が実行されることにより、コマンド処理が終了する。 In step SJ12, when the control unit 220 determines that the first remaining amount information has not been received, the command processing ends. In step SJ12, when the control unit 220 determines that the first remaining amount information is received, the control unit 220 determines the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 based on the first remaining amount information. Update. As a result, the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 200 becomes the same as the first battery remaining amount B1 indicated by the first remaining amount information (step SJ13). By executing the process in step SJ13, the command process ends.
 第6の実施形態における撮像モード制御方法は、第1のステップ(ステップSI12)および第2のステップ(ステップSI14)を有する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、通信装置20において、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する(第1のステップ)。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、通信装置20において、制御部220は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(第2のステップ)。本発明の各態様の撮像モード制御方法は、上記の第1および第2のステップ以外のステップを有していなくてもよい。 The imaging mode control method in the sixth embodiment has a first step (step SI12) and a second step (step SI14). When the imaging device 10 is operating in the first operation mode, in the communication device 20, the control unit 220 can continue the operation of the imaging device 10 in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Whether or not (first step). When it is determined that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, in the communication device 20, the control unit 220 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. A switching instruction indicating this is transmitted to the imaging apparatus 10 by the communication device 210 (second step). The imaging mode control method of each aspect of the present invention may not include steps other than the first and second steps described above.
 第6の実施形態において、撮像装置10の動作モードが第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替わったとき、第2の動作モードにおける動作に必要なバッテリー残量が確保されている可能性が高い。このため、撮像装置10が第2の動作モードで動作する可能性が高まりやすい。つまり、通信時のバッテリー残量の低下により撮像が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 In the sixth embodiment, when the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, there is a possibility that the remaining battery capacity necessary for the operation in the second operation mode is secured. Is expensive. For this reason, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates in the second operation mode is likely to increase. That is, a state in which imaging cannot be performed due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication is less likely to occur.
 (第6の実施形態の変形例)
 本発明の第6の実施形態の変形例において、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、設定情報および切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。設定情報は、撮像装置10が第2の動作モードで動作しているときに撮像装置10に設定される内容を示す。切替指示は、撮像装置10の動作モードを第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示す。第6の実施形態の変形例における第1の動作モードは、パラメータ設定モードである。
(Modification of the sixth embodiment)
In the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention, when the control unit 220 determines that the imaging apparatus 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 220 displays the setting information and the switching instruction as the communication device 210. To the imaging device 10. The setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device 10 when the imaging device 10 is operating in the second operation mode. The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. The first operation mode in the modification of the sixth embodiment is a parameter setting mode.
 図30は、第6の実施形態の変形例における動作モード管理処理の手順を示す。図30に示す処理について、図28に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 30 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in the modification of the sixth embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 30 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 メモリ200は、所定値L1を記憶する。所定値L1は、パラメータ設定モードにおける動作に最低限必要なバッテリー容量を示す。ステップSI11の後、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さいか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えるか否かを判断する。これにより、制御部220は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する(ステップSI20)。第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さい場合、制御部220は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断する。第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1以上である場合、制御部220は、撮像装置10が通信モードにおける動作を継続できると判断する。 The memory 200 stores a predetermined value L1. The predetermined value L1 indicates the minimum battery capacity required for operation in the parameter setting mode. After step SI11, control unit 220 determines whether or not first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than predetermined value L1. That is, the control unit 220 determines whether or not to switch the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the first battery remaining amount B1. Thereby, control part 220 judges whether imaging device 10 can continue operation in communication mode (Step SI20). When the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the communication mode. When the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 can continue the operation in the communication mode.
 ステップSI20において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1以上であると制御部220が判断した場合、動作モード管理処理が終了する。ステップSI20において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さいと制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSI13における処理が実行される。 In step SI20, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value L1, the operation mode management process ends. In step SI20, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1, the process in step SI13 is executed.
 ステップSI13の後、制御部220は、パラメータ設定のための制御情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSI21)。ステップSI21において送信される制御情報は、パラメータ設定指示および設定情報を含む。ステップSI21において送信される設定情報は、第2の動作モードにおけるパラメータである。例えば、設定情報は、スタンドアロン撮影モードにおける撮像パラメータである。ステップSI21の後、ステップSI14における処理が実行される。 After step SI13, the control unit 220 transmits control information for parameter setting to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SI21). The control information transmitted in step SI21 includes a parameter setting instruction and setting information. The setting information transmitted in step SI21 is a parameter in the second operation mode. For example, the setting information is an imaging parameter in the stand-alone imaging mode. After step SI21, the process in step SI14 is executed.
 パラメータ設定指示、設定情報、および切替指示は同時に送信されてもよい。その場合、パラメータ設定指示に関する処理が切替指示に関する処理の前に実行されることを示す制御情報が送信されてもよい。 The parameter setting instruction, setting information, and switching instruction may be transmitted simultaneously. In this case, control information indicating that the process related to the parameter setting instruction is executed before the process related to the switching instruction may be transmitted.
 上記以外の点について、図30に示す処理は、図28に示す処理と同様である。 30 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 28 with respect to points other than those described above.
 図30に示す処理において、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、設定情報および切替指示を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSI21およびステップSI14)。 In the process illustrated in FIG. 30, when the control unit 220 determines that the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit 220 transmits setting information and a switching instruction to the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210. (Step SI21 and Step SI14).
 ディスプレイ240は、撮像装置10の設定変更をユーザに通知してもよい。例えば、ステップSI20において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が所定値L1よりも小さいと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、設定情報の受付を示すメッセージをディスプレイ240に表示させる。ユーザインターフェース230は、設定情報の変更を受け付ける。ステップSI21において、制御部220は、パラメータ設定指示と、変更された設定情報とを含む制御情報を撮像装置10に送信する。 The display 240 may notify the user of a setting change of the imaging device 10. For example, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is smaller than the predetermined value L1 in step SI20, the control unit 220 displays a message indicating acceptance of the setting information on the display 240. The user interface 230 receives a change in setting information. In step SI21, the control unit 220 transmits control information including the parameter setting instruction and the changed setting information to the imaging device 10.
 前述した動作と同様の動作により、動作モードの切替をユーザに通知してもよい。動作モードの切替がユーザに通知された後、動作モードの切替を許可するか否かをユーザが決定してもよい。 The user may be notified of the switching of the operation mode by the same operation as described above. After the user is notified of the switching of the operation mode, the user may determine whether to permit the switching of the operation mode.
 第6の実施形態の変形例において、第1の動作モードにおける動作により第1のバッテリー残量が少なくなったとき、撮像装置10は設定情報を受信する。設定情報が受信された後、撮像装置10の動作モードが第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替わる。このため、撮像装置10の動作モードが変更される前に、撮像装置10は第2の動作モードに使用される設定情報を受信し、かつ設定情報に基づく設定を行うことができる。 In the modification of the sixth embodiment, the imaging device 10 receives the setting information when the first battery remaining amount is reduced by the operation in the first operation mode. After the setting information is received, the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. For this reason, before the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is changed, the imaging device 10 can receive the setting information used for the second operation mode and perform setting based on the setting information.
 (第7の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第7の実施形態を説明する。第7の実施形態において、通信装置20は第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードへの切替を制御する。また、撮像装置10は第2の動作モードから第1の動作モードへの切替を制御する。メモリ120は、第1のバッテリー残量、第2のバッテリー残量、第1のバッテリー容量、および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶する。メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。
(Seventh embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the communication device 20 controls switching from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. Further, the imaging apparatus 10 controls switching from the second operation mode to the first operation mode. The memory 120 stores a first battery remaining amount, a second battery remaining amount, a first battery capacity, and a second battery capacity. The memory 200 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount.
 第7の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図3に示す手順で動作する。図31は、ステップSAにおける起動処理の手順を示す。図31に示す処理について、図24に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 The imaging apparatus 10 according to the seventh embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 31 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SA. The process shown in FIG. 31 is different from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSA30の後、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSA40)。ステップSA40の後、制御部140は、第1の残量情報および第2の残量情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する(ステップSA41)。第1の残量情報は第1のバッテリー残量B1を示す。第2の残量情報は第2のバッテリー残量B2を示す。ステップSA41の後、ステップSA33における処理が実行される。 After step SA30, the controller 220 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 120 (step SA40). After step SA40, control unit 140 transmits the first remaining amount information and the second remaining amount information to communication device 20 through communication device 130 (step SA41). The first remaining amount information indicates the first remaining battery amount B1. The second remaining amount information indicates the second remaining battery amount B2. After step SA41, the process at step SA33 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図31に示す処理は、図24に示す処理と同様である。 Other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 31 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 第7の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図4に示す起動処理と同様の処理により、起動時の動作モードを決定してもよい。 The imaging apparatus 10 according to the seventh embodiment may determine the operation mode at the time of activation by a process similar to the activation process illustrated in FIG.
 図32は、ステップSBにおける動作モード管理処理の手順を示す。図32に示す処理について、図10に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 32 shows the procedure of the operation mode management process in step SB. The process shown in FIG. 32 is different from the process shown in FIG.
 図10に示す処理におけるステップSB10からステップSB14における処理は実行されない。ステップSB33の後、制御部140は、モード切替情報および第2の残量情報を通信装置20に送信する。モード切替情報は、撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替えられたことを示す(ステップSB40)。撮像装置10がスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作しているとき、撮像装置10は通信装置20と無線通信を行わない。撮像装置10の動作モードがスタンドアロン撮影モードから通信モードに切り替えられたとき、撮像装置10は第2のバッテリー残量B2を通信装置20に通知する。ステップSB40における処理が実行されることにより、動作モード管理処理が終了する。 The processing from step SB10 to step SB14 in the processing shown in FIG. 10 is not executed. After step SB33, control unit 140 transmits the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information to communication device 20. The mode switching information indicates that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has been switched from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode (step SB40). When the imaging device 10 is operating in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 does not perform wireless communication with the communication device 20. When the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is switched from the stand-alone shooting mode to the communication mode, the imaging device 10 notifies the communication device 20 of the second battery remaining amount B2. When the process in step SB40 is executed, the operation mode management process ends.
 上記以外の点について、図32に示す処理は、図10に示す処理と同様である。 32, the process shown in FIG. 32 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図33は、ステップSCにおけるコマンド処理の手順を示す。図33に示す処理について、図25に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 33 shows the procedure of command processing in step SC. The process shown in FIG. 33 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ユーザインターフェース150は、撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えることを示す切替指示をユーザから受け付けうる。その場合、ステップSC11において、制御部140は、モード切替情報および第2の残量情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。これにより、撮像装置10は第2のバッテリー残量B2を通信装置20に通知する。その後、制御部140は、切替指示に基づいて撮像装置10の動作モードを通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替える。 The user interface 150 can receive a switching instruction indicating that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode from the user. In that case, in step SC <b> 11, the control unit 140 transmits the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. As a result, the imaging device 10 notifies the communication device 20 of the second remaining battery level B2. Thereafter, the control unit 140 switches the operation mode of the imaging device 10 from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode based on the switching instruction.
 図33に示す処理において、図25に示す処理に対して、図11に示すステップSC20およびステップSC21における処理が追加されている。 33, processing in step SC20 and step SC21 shown in FIG. 11 is added to the processing shown in FIG.
 上記以外の点について、図33に示す処理は、図25に示す処理と同様である。 33, the processing shown in FIG. 33 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.
 撮像装置10において、バッテリー110が充電されるとき、図12に示す残量更新処理が実行される。 In the imaging apparatus 10, when the battery 110 is charged, the remaining amount update process shown in FIG. 12 is executed.
 第7の実施形態の通信装置20は、図26に示す手順で動作する。図34は、ステップSHにおける起動処理の手順を示す。図34に示す処理について、図27に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 The communication device 20 of the seventh embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 34 shows the procedure of the activation process in step SH. The process shown in FIG. 34 is different from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSH14において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が0でないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ200から読み込む(ステップSH20)。 In step SH14, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is not 0, the control unit 220 reads the second battery remaining amount B2 from the memory 200 (step SH20).
 ステップSH20の後、制御部220は、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であるか否かを判断する。つまり、制御部220は、第2のバッテリー残量B2に基づいて、撮像装置10の起動時の動作モードを判断する(ステップSH21)。第2のバッテリー残量B2が0である場合、撮像装置10はスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作することができない。第2のバッテリー残量B2が0でない場合、撮像装置10はスタンドアロン撮影モードで動作することができる。 After step SH20, the control unit 220 determines whether or not the second battery remaining amount B2 is zero. That is, the control unit 220 determines an operation mode when the imaging apparatus 10 is activated based on the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SH21). When the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the imaging device 10 cannot operate in the stand-alone shooting mode. When the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the imaging device 10 can operate in the stand-alone shooting mode.
 ステップSH21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0であると制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSH18における処理が実行される。ステップSH21において、第2のバッテリー残量B2が0でないと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、任意の動作モードを示す設定モード情報をメモリ120に記憶させる(ステップSH22)。 In step SH21, when the control unit 220 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is 0, the process in step SH18 is executed. In step SH21, when the control unit 220 determines that the second battery remaining amount B2 is not 0, the control unit 220 stores setting mode information indicating an arbitrary operation mode in the memory 120 (step SH22).
 ステップSH22の後、制御部220は、任意の動作モードで起動することを示す起動モード情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSH23)。この起動モード情報を受信した撮像装置10は、図31のステップSA34において、起動モード情報が示す動作モードで起動する。ステップSH17、ステップSH19、およびステップSH23のいずれか1つにおける処理が実行されることにより、起動処理が終了する。 After step SH22, the control unit 220 transmits activation mode information indicating that activation is performed in an arbitrary operation mode to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210 (step SH23). The imaging apparatus 10 that has received the activation mode information is activated in the operation mode indicated by the activation mode information in step SA34 in FIG. When the process in any one of step SH17, step SH19, and step SH23 is executed, the start-up process ends.
 上記以外の点について、図34に示す処理は、図27に示す処理と同様である。 34, the process shown in FIG. 34 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図35は、ステップSJにおけるコマンド処理の手順を示す。図35に示す処理について、図29に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 35 shows a command processing procedure in step SJ. The process shown in FIG. 35 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSJ10において、制御コマンドがユーザインターフェース230によって受け付けられていないと制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSJ20における処理が実行される。ステップSJ12において、第1の残量情報が受信されていないと制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSJ20における処理が実行される。 In step SJ10, when the control unit 220 determines that the control command is not accepted by the user interface 230, the process in step SJ20 is executed. If the control unit 220 determines in step SJ12 that the first remaining amount information has not been received, the process in step SJ20 is executed.
 ステップSJ13の後、制御部220は、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えられたか否かを判断する(ステップSJ20)。撮像装置10からモード切替情報および第2の残量情報が送信された場合、制御部220は、通信機210によってモード切替情報および第2の残量情報を撮像装置10から受信する。ステップSJ20において、制御部220は、モード切替情報および第2の残量情報が撮像装置10から受信されたか否かを判断する。モード切替情報および第2の残量情報が撮像装置10から受信された場合、制御部220は、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えられたと判断する。モード切替情報および第2の残量情報が撮像装置10から受信されていない場合、制御部220は、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えられていないと判断する。 After step SJ13, the control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode (step SJ20). When the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information are transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210. In step SJ20, control unit 220 determines whether or not the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information are received from imaging device 10. When the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information are received from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone imaging mode. When the mode switching information and the second remaining amount information are not received from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has not been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone imaging mode.
 ステップSJ20において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えられていないと制御部220が判断した場合、コマンド処理が終了する。ステップSJ20において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードからスタンドアロン撮影モードに切り替えられたと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、メモリ200に保存された設定モード情報を更新する。更新された設定モード情報は、スタンドアロン撮影モードを示す(ステップSJ21)。 In step SJ20, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 has not been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode, the command processing ends. In step SJ20, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 has been switched from the communication mode to the stand-alone shooting mode, the control unit 220 updates the setting mode information stored in the memory 200. The updated setting mode information indicates the stand-alone shooting mode (step SJ21).
 ステップSJ21の後、制御部220は、第2の残量情報に基づいて、メモリ200に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。これにより、メモリ200に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2は、第2の残量情報が示す第2のバッテリー残量B2と同一になる(ステップSJ22)。ステップSJ22における処理が実行されることにより、コマンド処理が終了する。 After step SJ21, the control unit 220 updates the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 200 based on the second remaining amount information. As a result, the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 200 becomes the same as the second battery remaining amount B2 indicated by the second remaining amount information (step SJ22). By executing the processing in step SJ22, the command processing ends.
 上記以外の点について、図35に示す処理は、図29に示す処理と同様である。 For other points, the process shown in FIG. 35 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 第7の実施形態において、第1および第2の動作モードの各々においてバッテリー残量が管理される。撮像装置10が第1または第2の動作モードにおける動作を継続することができない場合であっても、撮像装置10の動作モードが切り替わることにより、撮像装置10が動作する可能性が高まりやすい。つまり、撮像装置10に設定された動作モードにおけるバッテリー残量の低下により他の動作モードにおける処理が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 In the seventh embodiment, the remaining battery level is managed in each of the first and second operation modes. Even when the imaging device 10 cannot continue the operation in the first or second operation mode, the possibility that the imaging device 10 operates is likely to increase by switching the operation mode of the imaging device 10. That is, a state in which processing in another operation mode cannot be performed is less likely to occur due to a decrease in the remaining battery level in the operation mode set in the imaging apparatus 10.
 (第7の実施形態の第1の変形例)
 本発明の第7の実施形態の第1の変形例において、通信装置20は、バッテリー110の充電中における第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を決定する。バッテリー110の充電中、撮像装置10は、通信装置20によって決定された更新方法に従って第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を更新する。
(First Modification of Seventh Embodiment)
In the first modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the communication device 20 determines a method for updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. While the battery 110 is being charged, the imaging device 10 updates the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount according to the update method determined by the communication device 20.
 第7の実施形態の第1の変形例において、制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。方法情報は、バッテリー110の充電中における第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を示す。その更新方法は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量を第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす方法である。 In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the control unit 220 transmits method information to the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The method information indicates how to update the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level while the battery 110 is being charged. The update method is a method in which the first battery remaining amount is preferentially increased over the second battery remaining amount as the remaining amount of the battery 110 increases.
 第7の実施形態の第1の変形例において、制御部140は、方法情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。バッテリー110の充電中、制御部140は、受信された方法情報が示す更新方法により、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量を第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。 In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the control unit 140 receives method information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. While the battery 110 is being charged, the control unit 140 gives priority to the first battery remaining amount over the second battery remaining amount according to the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 according to the update method indicated by the received method information. Increase.
 図36は、通信装置20の動作の手順を示す。図36に示す処理について、図26に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 36 shows an operation procedure of the communication device 20. The process shown in FIG. 36 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSJの後、残量決定処理が実行される(ステップSM)。残量決定処理により、バッテリー残量の更新方法を決定する処理が実行される。ステップSMの後、ステップSKにおける処理が実行される。 After step SJ, remaining amount determination processing is executed (step SM). By the remaining amount determination process, a process for determining a battery remaining amount update method is executed. After step SM, the process in step SK is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図36に示す処理は、図26に示す処理と同様である。 36, the process shown in FIG. 36 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図37は、ステップSMにおける残量決定処理の手順を示す。図37を参照して残量決定処理における通信装置20の動作を説明する。 FIG. 37 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The operation of the communication device 20 in the remaining amount determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部220は、メモリ200に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSM10)。 The control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SM10).
 ステップSM10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部220が判断した場合、残量決定処理が終了する。ステップSM10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、方法情報を生成する(ステップSM11)。ステップSM11において生成される方法情報は、第1のバッテリー残量B1の増加を第2のバッテリー残量B2の増加よりも優先させる方法を示す。ステップSM11の後、制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSM12)。ステップSM12における処理が実行されることにより、残量決定処理が終了する。 In step SM10, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the remaining amount determination process ends. In step SM10, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM11). The method information generated in step SM11 indicates a method of giving priority to the increase in the first battery remaining amount B1 over the increase in the second battery remaining amount B2. After step SM11, the control unit 220 transmits method information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210 (step SM12). When the process in step SM12 is executed, the remaining amount determination process ends.
 例えば、方法情報を受信した撮像装置10は、バッテリー110の充電中、図12に示す処理により第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。 For example, the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information updates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 by the process illustrated in FIG. 12 while the battery 110 is being charged.
 第7の実施形態の第1の変形例において、バッテリー110の充電中に第1のバッテリー残量が第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先的に増える。これにより、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続しやすい。 In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
 (第7の実施形態の第2の変形例)
 図38は、本発明の第7の実施形態の第2の変形例における残量決定処理の手順を示す。図38に示す処理について、図37に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。
(Second modification of the seventh embodiment)
FIG. 38 shows the remaining amount determination processing procedure in the second modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. The process shown in FIG. 38 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSM10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、方法情報を生成する(ステップSM20)。ステップSM20において生成される方法情報は、第1のバッテリー残量B1を所定時間増加させた後に第2のバッテリー残量B2を所定時間増加させる方法を示す。ステップSM20において生成される方法情報は、その方法を繰り返し実行する方法を示してもよい。ステップSM20の後、ステップSM12における処理が実行される。 In step SM10, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM20). The method information generated in step SM20 indicates a method of increasing the second battery remaining amount B2 for a predetermined time after increasing the first battery remaining amount B1 for a predetermined time. The method information generated in step SM20 may indicate a method for repeatedly executing the method. After step SM20, the process in step SM12 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図38に示す処理は、図37に示す処理と同様である。 38, the processing shown in FIG. 38 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.
 例えば、方法情報を受信した撮像装置10は、バッテリー110の充電中、図13に示す処理により第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を更新する。 For example, the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information updates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 by the process illustrated in FIG. 13 while the battery 110 is being charged.
 第7の実施形態の第2の変形例において、バッテリー110の充電中に第1のバッテリー残量が第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先的に増える。これにより、撮像装置10が第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続しやすい。 In the second modification of the seventh embodiment, the first battery remaining amount preferentially increases over the second battery remaining amount while the battery 110 is being charged. Thereby, it is easy for the imaging device 10 to continue the operation in the first operation mode.
 (第8の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第8の実施形態を説明する。第8の実施形態において、メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。制御部220は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データの数に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。第1のバッテリー残量を増やすと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量を増やす。
(Eighth embodiment)
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount and a second battery remaining amount. The control unit 220 determines whether or not to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of image data generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging. When the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit 220 increases the first battery remaining amount.
 撮像装置10のメモリ120は、未転送画像数を記憶する。未転送画像数は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成され、かつ通信装置20に転送されていない画像データの数である。未転送画像数は、0以上の整数である。イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより画像データが生成されたとき、未転送画像数が1増える。メモリ120に記憶された画像データが通信装置20に転送されたとき、未転送画像数が1減る。制御部140は、未転送画像数を示す未転送画像情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20の制御部220は、未転送画像情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。制御部220は、未転送画像数に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。第8の実施形態における第1の動作モードは、画像転送モードである。 The memory 120 of the imaging device 10 stores the number of untransferred images. The number of untransferred images is the number of image data that is generated when the image sensor 100 performs imaging and is not transferred to the communication device 20. The number of untransferred images is an integer of 0 or more. When image data is generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging, the number of untransferred images increases by one. When the image data stored in the memory 120 is transferred to the communication device 20, the number of untransferred images is reduced by one. The control unit 140 transmits untransferred image information indicating the number of untransferred images to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. The control unit 220 of the communication device 20 receives untransferred image information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The control unit 220 determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of untransferred images. The first operation mode in the eighth embodiment is an image transfer mode.
 第8の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図3に示す手順で動作する。図39は、ステップSGにおける電源管理処理の手順を示す。図39を参照して電源管理処理における撮像装置10の動作を説明する。 The imaging apparatus 10 according to the eighth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 39 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The operation of the imaging apparatus 10 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部140は、メモリ120に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSG60)。 The control unit 140 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 120 (step SG60).
 ステップSG60において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部220が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSG60において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、未転送画像数Ctをメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG61)。ステップSG61の後、制御部140は、未転送画像数Ctを示す未転送画像情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。これにより、制御部140は、未転送画像数Ctを通信装置20に通知する(ステップSG62)。 In step SG60, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is not the communication mode, the power management process ends. In step SG60, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 reads the number of untransferred images Ct from the memory 120 (step SG61). After step SG61, the control unit 140 transmits untransferred image information indicating the number of untransferred images Ct to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. Thereby, the control part 140 notifies the communication apparatus 20 of the number Ct of untransferred images (step SG62).
 残量変更情報が通信装置20から送信された場合、制御部140は、残量変更情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。残量変更情報は、変更された第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を示す。ステップSG62の後、制御部140は、残量変更情報が通信装置20から受信されたか否かを判断する(ステップSG63)。 When the remaining amount change information is transmitted from the communication device 20, the control unit 140 receives the remaining amount change information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. The remaining amount change information indicates the changed first battery remaining amount B1 and second battery remaining amount B2. After step SG62, control unit 140 determines whether or not remaining amount change information has been received from communication device 20 (step SG63).
 ステップSG63において、残量変更情報が通信装置20から受信されていないと制御部140が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSG63において、残量変更情報が通信装置20から受信されたと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、残量変更情報に基づいて第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を変更する。これにより、メモリ120に記憶された第1のバッテリー残量B1は、残量変更情報が示す第1のバッテリー残量B1と同一になる。また、メモリ120に記憶された第2のバッテリー残量B2は、残量変更情報が示す第2のバッテリー残量B2と同一になる(ステップSG64)。ステップSG64における処理が実行されることにより、電源管理処理が終了する。 In step SG63, when the control unit 140 determines that the remaining amount change information is not received from the communication device 20, the power management process ends. In step SG63, when the control unit 140 determines that the remaining amount change information has been received from the communication device 20, the control unit 140 determines the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount based on the remaining amount change information. Change B2. As a result, the first battery remaining amount B1 stored in the memory 120 becomes the same as the first battery remaining amount B1 indicated by the remaining amount change information. Further, the second battery remaining amount B2 stored in the memory 120 becomes the same as the second battery remaining amount B2 indicated by the remaining amount change information (step SG64). By executing the process in step SG64, the power management process ends.
 図40は、通信装置20の動作の手順を示す。図40に示す処理について、図26に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 40 shows an operation procedure of the communication device 20. The process shown in FIG. 40 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSJの後、電源管理処理が実行される(ステップSN)。電源管理処理により、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量が調整される。ステップSNの後、ステップSKにおける処理が実行される。 After step SJ, power management processing is executed (step SN). The first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount are adjusted by the power management process. After step SN, the process in step SK is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図40に示す処理は、図26に示す処理と同様である。 Other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 40 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図41は、ステップSNにおける電源管理処理の手順を示す。図41を参照して電源管理処理における通信装置20の動作を説明する。 FIG. 41 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SN. The operation of the communication device 20 in the power management process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部220は、メモリ200に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSN10)。 The control unit 220 determines whether the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SN10).
 ステップSN10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部220が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSN10において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から受信されたか否かを判断する(ステップSN11)。未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から送信された場合、制御部220は、未転送画像情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。 In step SN10, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the power management process ends. In step SN10, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 determines whether untransferred image information is received from the imaging device 10 (step SN11). . When untransferred image information is transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the untransferred image information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210.
 ステップSN11において、未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から受信されていないと制御部220が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSN11において、未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から受信されたと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、未転送画像情報が示す未転送画像数Ctをメモリ200に記憶させる(ステップSN12)。 In step SN11, when the control unit 220 determines that untransferred image information has not been received from the imaging device 10, the power management process ends. When the control unit 220 determines in step SN11 that untransferred image information has been received from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 stores the number of untransferred images Ct indicated by the untransferred image information in the memory 200 (step SN12). .
 ステップSN12の後、ステップSN13における処理が実行される。ステップSN13からステップSN19の各々における処理は、処理主体を除いて、図18に示すステップSG40からステップSG46の各々における処理と同様である。ステップSN13からステップSN19の各々における処理主体は、制御部220である。 After step SN12, the process in step SN13 is executed. Processing in each of steps SN13 to SN19 is the same as the processing in each of steps SG40 to SG46 shown in FIG. The processing subject in each of steps SN13 to SN19 is control unit 220.
 ステップSN19の後、制御部220は、残量変更情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSN20)。残量変更情報は、ステップSN19における処理により変更された第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を示す。ステップSN20における処理が実行されることにより、電源管理処理が終了する。 After step SN19, the control unit 220 transmits the remaining amount change information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SN20). The remaining amount change information indicates the first remaining battery amount B1 and the second remaining battery amount B2 that have been changed by the process in step SN19. By executing the process in step SN20, the power management process ends.
 図41に示す処理において、制御部220は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データの数(未転送画像数Ct)に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やすか否かを判断する(ステップSN16)。第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やすと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やす(ステップSN19)。撮像装置10が画像転送モードで動作しているときのみ、図41に示す処理が実行されてもよい。 In the process shown in FIG. 41, the control unit 220 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 based on the number of image data (the number of untransferred images Ct) generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. It is determined whether or not (step SN16). When the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is increased, the control unit 220 increases the first battery remaining amount B1 (step SN19). The process shown in FIG. 41 may be executed only when the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the image transfer mode.
 第8の実施形態において、第1のバッテリー残量が画像の転送に十分でない場合、制御部140は第1のバッテリー残量を増やす。これにより、撮像装置10は、画像の転送に必要な第1のバッテリー残量を確保することができる。 In the eighth embodiment, when the first battery remaining amount is not sufficient for image transfer, the control unit 140 increases the first battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can ensure the first remaining battery level necessary for image transfer.
 (第9の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第9の実施形態を説明する。第9の実施形態において、メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。制御部220は、メモリ200に記憶された画像データの数に基づいて、第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。第2のバッテリー残量を増やすと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、第2のバッテリー残量を増やす。
(Ninth embodiment)
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the ninth embodiment, the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount and a second battery remaining amount. The control unit 220 determines whether or not to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data stored in the memory 200. When the control unit 220 determines that the second battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit 220 increases the second battery remaining amount.
 撮像装置10のメモリ120は、撮影予定枚数を記憶する。撮影予定枚数は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数である。撮影予定枚数は、1以上の整数である。イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより画像データが生成されたとき、撮影予定枚数が1減る。制御部140は、撮影予定枚数を示す撮影予定情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。通信装置20の制御部220は、撮影予定情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。制御部220は、撮影予定情報が示す撮影予定枚数に基づいて、第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断する。 The memory 120 of the imaging apparatus 10 stores the scheduled number of shots. The scheduled number of images is the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. The planned number of shots is an integer of 1 or more. When image data is generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging, the scheduled number of images is reduced by one. The control unit 140 transmits shooting schedule information indicating the number of shots to be shot to the communication device 20 via the communication device 130. The control unit 220 of the communication device 20 receives the shooting schedule information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The control unit 220 determines whether to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the scheduled number of images indicated by the imaging schedule information.
 第9の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図3に示す手順で動作する。図42は、ステップSGにおける電源管理処理の手順を示す。図42に示す処理について、図39に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 The imaging apparatus 10 of the ninth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 42 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SG. The process shown in FIG. 42 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSG60において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、撮影予定枚数Csをメモリ120から読み込む(ステップSG70)。ステップSG70の後、制御部140は、撮影予定枚数Csを示す撮影予定情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。これにより、制御部140は、撮影予定枚数Csを通信装置20に通知する(ステップSG71)。ステップSG71の後、ステップSG63における処理が実行される。 In step SG60, when the control unit 140 determines that the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 140 reads the scheduled number of images Cs from the memory 120 (step SG70). After step SG70, the control unit 140 transmits shooting schedule information indicating the shooting schedule number Cs to the communication device 20 through the communication device 130. Thereby, the control unit 140 notifies the communication device 20 of the scheduled number of images Cs (step SG71). After step SG71, the process in step SG63 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図42に示す処理は、図39に示す処理と同様である。 42, the process shown in FIG. 42 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 第9の実施形態の通信装置20は、図40に示す手順で動作する。図43は、ステップSNにおける電源管理処理の手順を示す。図43に示す処理について、図41に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 The communication device 20 of the ninth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 43 shows the procedure of the power management process in step SN. The process shown in FIG. 43 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 制御部220は、メモリ200に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSN30)。 The control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SN30).
 ステップSN30において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部220が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSN30において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、撮影予定情報が撮像装置10から受信されたか否かを判断する(ステップSN31)。撮影予定情報が撮像装置10から送信された場合、制御部220は、撮影予定情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。 In step SN30, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the power management process ends. In step SN30, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 determines whether or not shooting schedule information has been received from the imaging device 10 (step SN31). When the shooting schedule information is transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the shooting schedule information from the imaging device 10 via the communication device 210.
 ステップSN31において、撮影予定情報が撮像装置10から受信されていないと制御部220が判断した場合、電源管理処理が終了する。ステップSN31において、撮影予定情報が撮像装置10から受信されたと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、撮影予定情報が示す撮影予定枚数Csをメモリ200に記憶させる(ステップSN32)。 In step SN31, when the control unit 220 determines that the shooting schedule information is not received from the imaging device 10, the power management process ends. In step SN31, when the control unit 220 determines that the shooting schedule information is received from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 stores the scheduled shooting number Cs indicated by the shooting schedule information in the memory 200 (step SN32).
 ステップSN32の後、ステップSN33における処理が実行される。ステップSN33からステップSN39の各々における処理は、処理主体を除いて、図19に示すステップSG50からステップSG56の各々における処理と同様である。ステップSN33からステップSN39の各々における処理主体は、制御部220である。 After step SN32, the process in step SN33 is executed. Processing in each of steps SN33 to SN39 is the same as the processing in each of steps SG50 to SG56 shown in FIG. 19 except for the processing subject. The processing subject in each of steps SN33 to SN39 is the control unit 220.
 ステップSN39の後、制御部220は、残量変更情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSN40)。残量変更情報は、ステップSN39における処理により変更された第1のバッテリー残量B1および第2のバッテリー残量B2を示す。ステップSN40における処理が実行されることにより、電源管理処理が終了する。 After step SN39, the control unit 220 transmits the remaining amount change information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SN40). The remaining amount change information indicates the first battery remaining amount B1 and the second battery remaining amount B2 that have been changed by the process in step SN39. By executing the process in step SN40, the power management process ends.
 図43に示す処理において、制御部220は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数(撮影予定枚数Cs)に基づいて、第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やすか否かを判断する(ステップSN36)。第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やすと制御部140が判断した場合、制御部140は、第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やす(ステップSN39)。 In the process shown in FIG. 43, the control unit 220 calculates the second battery remaining amount B2 based on the number of image data (scheduled number of images Cs) that is scheduled to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. It is determined whether or not to increase (step SN36). When the control unit 140 determines to increase the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 140 increases the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SN39).
 第9の実施形態において、第2のバッテリー残量が画像の撮影に十分でない場合、制御部220は第2のバッテリー残量を増やす。これにより、撮像装置10は、画像の撮影に必要な第2のバッテリー残量を確保することができる。前述したように、スタンドアロン撮影モードでは、リモート撮影モードと比較して、撮像装置10は、より多くの画像データを取得することができる。このため、撮像装置10は、撮影予定枚数の画像データをより確実に取得することができる。 In the ninth embodiment, when the second battery remaining amount is not sufficient for capturing an image, the control unit 220 increases the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can secure the second battery remaining amount necessary for capturing an image. As described above, in the stand-alone shooting mode, the imaging device 10 can acquire more image data than in the remote shooting mode. For this reason, the imaging device 10 can acquire the image data of the scheduled number of images more reliably.
 (第10の実施形態)
 図1に示す撮像システム1を使用して本発明の第10の実施形態を説明する。第10の実施形態において、メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する。制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する。方法情報は、バッテリー110の充電中における第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を示す。その更新方法は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす方法である。
(Tenth embodiment)
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the imaging system 1 shown in FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount and a second battery remaining amount. The control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. The control unit 220 transmits method information to the imaging apparatus 10 via the communication device 210. The method information indicates how to update the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level while the battery 110 is being charged. According to the update method, as the remaining amount of the battery 110 increases, the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority among the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level is higher than the remaining battery levels. It is a method of increasing priority.
 第10の実施形態において、制御部140は、方法情報を通信機130によって通信装置20から受信する。バッテリー110の充電中、制御部140は、受信された方法情報が示す更新方法により、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。 In the tenth embodiment, the control unit 140 receives method information from the communication device 20 by the communication device 130. While the battery 110 is being charged, the control unit 140 gives priority to the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount according to the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110 according to the update method indicated by the received method information. The remaining battery level determined to increase is given priority over other remaining battery levels.
 第10の実施形態の撮像装置10は、図23に示す手順で動作する。第10の実施形態の通信装置20は、図36に示す手順で動作する。図44は、ステップSMにおける残量決定処理の手順を示す。図44を参照して残量決定処理における通信装置20の動作を説明する。 The imaging apparatus 10 of the tenth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. The communication device 20 of the tenth embodiment operates according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 44 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The operation of the communication device 20 in the remaining amount determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
 制御部220は、メモリ200に記憶された設定モード情報に基づいて、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであるか否かを判断する(ステップSM30)。 The control unit 220 determines whether or not the operation mode of the imaging apparatus 10 is the communication mode based on the setting mode information stored in the memory 200 (step SM30).
 ステップSM30において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードでないと制御部220が判断した場合、残量決定処理が終了する。ステップSM30において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1をメモリ200から読み込む(ステップSM31)。ステップSM31の後、制御部220は、第2のバッテリー残量B2をメモリ200から読み込む(ステップSM32)。ステップSM31およびステップSM32における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。ステップSM32の後、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSM33)。 In step SM30, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is not the communication mode, the remaining amount determination process ends. In step SM30, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 reads the first battery remaining amount B1 from the memory 200 (step SM31). After step SM31, control unit 220 reads second battery remaining amount B2 from memory 200 (step SM32). The order of processing in step SM31 and step SM32 may be switched. After step SM32, the control unit 220 determines whether or not the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2 (step SM33).
 ステップSM33において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第2のバッテリー残量B2よりも大きいと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、方法情報を生成する(ステップSM34)。ステップSM34において生成される方法情報は、第2のバッテリー残量B2の増加を第1のバッテリー残量B1の増加よりも優先させる方法を示す。ステップSM34の後、制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSM36)。ステップSM36における処理が実行されることにより、残量決定処理が終了する。 In step SM33, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is larger than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM34). The method information generated in step SM34 indicates a method of giving priority to the increase in the second battery remaining amount B2 over the increase in the first battery remaining amount B1. After step SM34, the control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36). When the process in step SM36 is executed, the remaining amount determination process ends.
 ステップSM33において、第1のバッテリー残量B1が第2のバッテリー残量B2以下であると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、方法情報を生成する(ステップSM35)。ステップSM35において生成される方法情報は、第1のバッテリー残量B1の増加を第2のバッテリー残量B2の増加よりも優先させる方法を示す。ステップSM35の後、ステップSM36における処理が実行される。 In step SM33, when the control unit 220 determines that the first battery remaining amount B1 is equal to or less than the second battery remaining amount B2, the control unit 220 generates method information (step SM35). The method information generated in step SM35 indicates a method of giving priority to the increase in the first battery remaining amount B1 over the increase in the second battery remaining amount B2. After step SM35, the process in step SM36 is executed.
 図44に示す処理において、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する(ステップSM33)。制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSM36)。 In the processing shown in FIG. 44, the control unit 220 prioritizes increasing the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Is determined (step SM33). The control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
 例えば、方法情報を受信した撮像装置10は、バッテリー110の充電中、方法情報に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。 For example, the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information is determined to preferentially increase the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount based on the method information while the battery 110 is being charged. Increase the priority over other battery levels.
 第10の実施形態において、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、優先して増やすバッテリー残量を決定する。その結果、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち、より少ないバッテリー残量が優先される。これにより、撮像装置10は、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのどちらにおいても動作することができる。 In the tenth embodiment, the control unit 220 determines a battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. As a result, priority is given to a smaller battery remaining amount of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
 (第10の実施形態の第1の変形例)
 第10の実施形態の第1の変形例において、メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量、第2のバッテリー残量、第1のバッテリー容量、および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶する。制御部220は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する。第1の比率は、第1のバッテリー容量に対する第1のバッテリー残量の比率である。第2の比率は、第2のバッテリー容量に対する第2のバッテリー残量の比率である。
(First Modification of Tenth Embodiment)
In the first modification of the tenth embodiment, the memory 200 stores a first battery remaining amount, a second battery remaining amount, a first battery capacity, and a second battery capacity. Based on the first ratio and the second ratio, the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased. The first ratio is a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity. The second ratio is a ratio of the second remaining battery capacity to the second battery capacity.
 図45は、ステップSMにおける残量決定処理の手順を示す。図45に示す処理について、図44に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 45 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The process shown in FIG. 45 will be described while referring to differences from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSM32の後、制御部220は、第1のバッテリー容量に対する第1のバッテリー残量B1の第1の比率P1を算出する(ステップSM40)。ステップSM40の後、制御部220は、第2のバッテリー容量に対する第2のバッテリー残量B2の第2の比率P2を算出する(ステップSM41)。ステップSM40およびステップSM41における処理の順番は入れ替わってもよい。ステップSM41の後、制御部220は、第1の比率P1が第2の比率P2よりも大きいか否かを判断する(ステップSM42)。 After step SM32, the controller 220 calculates a first ratio P1 of the first remaining battery charge B1 with respect to the first battery capacity (step SM40). After step SM40, the controller 220 calculates a second ratio P2 of the second battery remaining amount B2 with respect to the second battery capacity (step SM41). The order of processing in step SM40 and step SM41 may be switched. After step SM41, control unit 220 determines whether or not first ratio P1 is greater than second ratio P2 (step SM42).
 ステップSM42において、第1の比率P1が第2の比率P2よりも大きいと制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSM34における処理が実行される。ステップSM42において、第1の比率P1が第2の比率P2以下であると制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSM35における処理が実行される。 In step SM42, when the control unit 220 determines that the first ratio P1 is larger than the second ratio P2, the process in step SM34 is executed. In step SM42, when the control unit 220 determines that the first ratio P1 is equal to or less than the second ratio P2, the process in step SM35 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図45に示す処理は、図44に示す処理と同様である。 Other than the above, the process shown in FIG. 45 is the same as the process shown in FIG.
 図45に示す処理において、制御部220は、第1の比率P1および第2の比率P2に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する(ステップSM42)。制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSM36)。 In the process shown in FIG. 45, the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio P1 and the second ratio P2. (Step SM42). The control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
 例えば、方法情報を受信した撮像装置10は、バッテリー110の充電中、方法情報に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす。 For example, the imaging apparatus 10 that has received the method information is determined to preferentially increase the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount based on the method information while the battery 110 is being charged. Increase the priority over other battery levels.
 第10の実施形態の第1の変形例において、制御部220は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、優先して増やすバッテリー残量を決定する。その結果、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち、各動作モードに割り当てられたバッテリー容量に対する比率がより少ないバッテリー残量が優先される。これにより、撮像装置10は、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのどちらにおいても動作することができる。 In the first modification of the tenth embodiment, the control unit 220 determines the remaining battery amount to be preferentially increased based on the first ratio and the second ratio. As a result, priority is given to a battery remaining amount having a smaller ratio to the battery capacity allocated to each operation mode out of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
 (第10の実施形態の第2の変形例)
 第10の実施形態の第2の変形例において、メモリ200は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量を記憶する。さらに、メモリ200は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの第1の数を記憶する。撮像装置10が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、制御部140は、イメージセンサ100が撮像を実行することにより生成された画像データの第2の数をカウントする。制御部140は、第1の数および第2の数を示す画像数情報を通信機130によって通信装置20に送信する。
(Second Modification of Tenth Embodiment)
In the second modification of the tenth embodiment, the memory 200 stores the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. Furthermore, the memory 200 stores a first number of image data that is to be generated when the image sensor 100 executes imaging. When the imaging apparatus 10 is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit 140 counts the second number of image data generated by the image sensor 100 performing imaging. The control unit 140 transmits image number information indicating the first number and the second number to the communication device 20 by the communication device 130.
 通信装置20の制御部220は、画像数情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。制御部220は、第1の数に相当する画像データが通信装置20に送信された後の第1のバッテリー残量の第1の推定値を算出する。制御部220は、第2の数に相当する撮像がイメージセンサ100によって実行された後の第2のバッテリー残量の第2の推定値を算出する。制御部220は、第1の推定値および第2の推定値に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する。第10の実施形態の第2の変形例における第1の動作モードは、画像転送モードである。 The control unit 220 of the communication device 20 receives the image number information from the imaging device 10 by the communication device 210. The control unit 220 calculates a first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number is transmitted to the communication device 20. The control unit 220 calculates a second estimated value of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number. Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, the control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased. The first operation mode in the second modification of the tenth embodiment is an image transfer mode.
 図46は、ステップSMにおける残量決定処理の手順を示す。図46に示す処理について、図44に示す処理と異なる点を説明する。 FIG. 46 shows the procedure of remaining amount determination processing in step SM. The process shown in FIG. 46 is different from the process shown in FIG.
 ステップSM30において、撮像装置10の動作モードが通信モードであると制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、撮影予定情報および未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から受信されたか否かを判断する(ステップSM50)。撮影予定情報および未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から送信された場合、制御部220は、撮影予定情報および未転送画像情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10から受信する。 In step SM30, when the control unit 220 determines that the operation mode of the imaging device 10 is the communication mode, the control unit 220 determines whether the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information are received from the imaging device 10. (Step SM50). When the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information are transmitted from the imaging device 10, the control unit 220 receives the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information from the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210.
 ステップSM50において撮影予定情報および未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から受信されていないと制御部220が判断した場合、残量決定処理が終了する。ステップSM50において撮影予定情報および未転送画像情報が撮像装置10から受信されたと制御部220が判断した場合、制御部220は、撮影予定情報が示す撮影予定枚数Csと、未転送画像情報が示す未転送画像数Ctとをメモリ200に記憶させる(ステップSM51)。ステップSM51の後、ステップSM31における処理が実行される。 When the control unit 220 determines that the shooting schedule information and the untransferred image information are not received from the imaging device 10 in step SM50, the remaining amount determination process ends. When the control unit 220 determines that the scheduled shooting information and the untransferred image information are received from the imaging device 10 in step SM50, the control unit 220 displays the scheduled shooting number Cs indicated by the scheduled shooting information and the untransferred image information indicated by the untransferred image information. The number of transferred images Ct is stored in the memory 200 (step SM51). After step SM51, the process in step SM31 is executed.
 ステップSM32の後、ステップSM52における処理が実行される。ステップSM52からステップSM56の各々における処理は、処理主体を除いて、図22に示すステップSF60からステップSF64の各々における処理と同様である。ステップSM52からステップSM56の各々における処理主体は、制御部220である。 After step SM32, the process in step SM52 is executed. Processing in each of step SM52 to step SM56 is the same as the processing in each of steps SF60 to SF64 shown in FIG. The processing subject in each of steps SM52 to SM56 is control unit 220.
 ステップSM56において、第1の推定残量B1’が第2の推定残量B2’よりも大きいと制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSM34における処理が実行される。ステップSM56において、第1の推定残量B1’が第2の推定残量B2’以下であると制御部220が判断した場合、ステップSM35における処理が実行される。 In step SM56, when the control unit 220 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is larger than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SM34 is executed. In step SM56, when the control unit 220 determines that the first estimated remaining amount B1 'is equal to or less than the second estimated remaining amount B2', the process in step SM35 is executed.
 上記以外の点について、図46に示す処理は、図44に示す処理と同様である。 46, the processing shown in FIG. 46 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.
 図46に示す処理において、制御部220は、第1の数(未転送画像数Ct)に相当する画像データが通信装置20に送信された後の第1のバッテリー残量の第1の推定値(第1の推定残量B1’)を算出する(ステップSM55)。制御部220は、第2の数(撮影予定枚数Cs)に相当する撮像がイメージセンサ100によって実行された後の第2のバッテリー残量の第2の推定値(第2の推定残量B2’)を算出する(ステップSM54)。制御部220は、第1の推定値および第2の推定値に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断する(ステップSM56)。制御部220は、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす(ステップSM34およびステップSM35)。制御部220は、方法情報を通信機210によって撮像装置10に送信する(ステップSM36)。 In the process illustrated in FIG. 46, the control unit 220 includes the first estimated value of the first remaining battery level after image data corresponding to the first number (the number Ct of untransferred images) is transmitted to the communication device 20. (First estimated remaining amount B1 ′) is calculated (step SM55). The control unit 220 uses the second estimated value (second estimated remaining amount B2 ′) of the second battery remaining amount after the image sensor 100 executes imaging corresponding to the second number (scheduled number of images Cs). ) Is calculated (step SM54). Based on the first estimated value and the second estimated value, control unit 220 determines which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased (step SM56). The controller 220 preferentially increases the remaining battery level determined to increase with priority over the remaining battery levels of the first battery level and the second battery level (step SM34 and step SM35). . The control unit 220 transmits the method information to the imaging device 10 through the communication device 210 (step SM36).
 メモリ200は、撮像装置10が前回の第1の動作モードで動作した第1の時間と、撮像装置10が前回の第2の動作モードで動作した第2の時間とを記憶してもよい。制御部220は、第1の時間および第2の時間に基づいて、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断してもよい。例えば、第1の時間が第2の時間よりも長い場合、制御部220は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第2のバッテリー残量B2を増やすと判断する。また、第1の時間が第2の時間以下である場合、制御部220は、バッテリー110の残量の増加に応じて第1のバッテリー残量B1を増やすと判断する。 The memory 200 may store a first time when the imaging device 10 operates in the previous first operation mode and a second time when the imaging device 10 operates in the previous second operation mode. The controller 220 may determine which of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first time and the second time. For example, when the first time is longer than the second time, the control unit 220 determines to increase the second battery remaining amount B2 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110. Further, when the first time is equal to or shorter than the second time, the control unit 220 determines to increase the first battery remaining amount B1 in accordance with the increase in the remaining amount of the battery 110.
 第10の実施形態の第2の変形例において、制御部220は、第1の推定残量B1’および第2の推定残量B2’に基づいて、優先して増やすバッテリー残量を決定する。その結果、第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量のうち、予定されている動作が行われた後に、より少なくなるバッテリー残量が優先される。これにより、撮像装置10は、第1の動作モードおよび第2の動作モードのどちらにおいても動作することができる。 In the second modification of the tenth embodiment, the control unit 220 determines the battery remaining amount to be preferentially increased based on the first estimated remaining amount B1 'and the second estimated remaining amount B2'. As a result, of the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount, priority is given to the remaining battery remaining amount after the scheduled operation is performed. Thereby, the imaging device 10 can operate in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
 以上、本発明の好ましい実施形態を説明したが、本発明はこれら実施形態およびその変形例に限定されることはない。本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で、構成の付加、省略、置換、およびその他の変更が可能である。また、本発明は前述した説明によって限定されることはなく、添付のクレームの範囲によってのみ限定される。 As mentioned above, although preferable embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to these embodiment and its modification. Additions, omissions, substitutions, and other modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, the present invention is not limited by the above description, and is limited only by the scope of the appended claims.
 本発明の各実施形態によれば、通信時のバッテリー残量の低下により撮像が実行できない状態が発生しにくくなる。 According to each embodiment of the present invention, a state in which imaging cannot be performed is less likely to occur due to a decrease in the remaining battery level during communication.
 1 撮像システム
 10 撮像装置
 20 通信装置
 30 レンズモジュール
 100 イメージセンサ
 110 バッテリー
 120,200 メモリ
 130,210 通信機
 140,220 制御部
 150,230 ユーザインターフェース
 151 シャッターボタン
 152 電源ボタン
 240 ディスプレイ
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Imaging system 10 Imaging apparatus 20 Communication apparatus 30 Lens module 100 Image sensor 110 Battery 120,200 Memory 130,210 Communication apparatus 140,220 Control part 150,230 User interface 151 Shutter button 152 Power button 240 Display

Claims (19)

  1.  イメージセンサ、バッテリー、メモリ、通信機、制御部、およびユーザインターフェースを有する撮像装置であって、
     前記メモリは、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断し、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替え、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記制御部が実行する制御に使用される制御情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     撮像装置。
    An imaging device having an image sensor, a battery, a memory, a communication device, a control unit, and a user interface,
    The memory stores a first remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery;
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Judging
    When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. ,
    In the first operation mode, the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operating mode in which at least one of
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging to the communication device by the communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control executed by the control unit from the communication device by the communication device,
    The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device,
    In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. Is an operation mode for performing imaging based on
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
  2.  前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、設定情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信し、
     前記設定情報は、前記撮像装置が前記第2の動作モードで動作しているときに前記撮像装置に設定される内容を示し、
     前記設定情報が受信された後、前記制御部は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える
     請求項1に記載の撮像装置。
    When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit receives setting information from the communication device by the communication device,
    The setting information indicates contents set in the imaging device when the imaging device is operating in the second operation mode.
    The imaging apparatus according to claim 1, wherein after the setting information is received, the control unit switches an operation mode of the imaging apparatus from the first operation mode to a second operation mode.
  3.  前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成された前記画像データの数をカウントし、
     前記制御部は、カウントされた前記画像データの前記数に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断し、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やす
     請求項1に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit counts the number of the image data generated by the image sensor executing the imaging,
    The control unit determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of the counted image data,
    The imaging device according to claim 1, wherein when the control unit determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit increases the first battery remaining amount.
  4.  前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数に基づいて、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断し、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やし、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     請求項1に記載の撮像装置。
    The memory further stores a second remaining battery capacity that is less than the overall capacity of the battery;
    The control unit determines whether to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated by the image sensor executing the imaging,
    When the control unit determines to increase the second battery remaining amount, the control unit increases the second battery remaining amount,
    The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
    The imaging device according to claim 1, wherein the second battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  5.  前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記バッテリーの充電中、前記制御部は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を前記第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やし、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     請求項1に記載の撮像装置。
    The memory further stores a second remaining battery capacity that is less than the overall capacity of the battery;
    During charging of the battery, the control unit increases the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount in response to an increase in the remaining battery amount,
    The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
    The imaging device according to claim 1, wherein the second battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  6.  前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断し、
     前記バッテリーの充電中、前記制御部は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やし、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     請求項1に記載の撮像装置。
    The memory further stores a second remaining battery capacity that is less than the overall capacity of the battery;
    The control unit determines whether the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. ,
    During charging of the battery, the control unit determines that priority is given to increasing the remaining amount of the first battery and the remaining amount of the second battery according to an increase in the remaining amount of the battery. Increase over other battery levels,
    The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
    The imaging device according to claim 1, wherein the second battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  7.  前記メモリはさらに、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶し、
     前記制御部は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断し、
     前記第1のバッテリー容量は、前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー容量は、前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であり、
     前記第1の比率は、前記第1のバッテリー容量に対する前記第1のバッテリー残量の比率であり、
     前記第2の比率は、前記第2のバッテリー容量に対する前記第2のバッテリー残量の比率である
     請求項6に記載の撮像装置。
    The memory further stores a first battery capacity and a second battery capacity;
    The controller determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount preferentially based on the first ratio and the second ratio;
    The first battery capacity is a battery capacity that is assigned to the first operation mode and not assigned to the second operation mode;
    The second battery capacity is a battery capacity that is assigned to the second operation mode and not assigned to the first operation mode;
    The first ratio is a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity,
    The imaging device according to claim 6, wherein the second ratio is a ratio of the second battery remaining amount to the second battery capacity.
  8.  メモリ、第1の通信機、および制御部を有する通信装置であって、
     撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有し、
     前記メモリは、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断し、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、切替指示を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信し、
     前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示し、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記第1の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第1の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     通信装置。
    A communication device having a memory, a first communication device, and a control unit,
    The imaging device has an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface,
    The memory stores a first remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery;
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the control unit determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Judging
    When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device,
    The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging device is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode,
    In the first operation mode, the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and An operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed;
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor performing imaging to the communication device by the first communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control in the imaging apparatus from the communication apparatus by the second communication device,
    The third processing is processing for executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. ,
    In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. Is an operation mode in which imaging is performed based on an operation via
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
  9.  前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、設定情報および前記切替指示を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信し、
     前記設定情報は、前記撮像装置が前記第2の動作モードで動作しているときに前記撮像装置に設定される内容を示す
     請求項8に記載の通信装置。
    When the control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the control unit transmits setting information and the switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device,
    The communication apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the setting information indicates content set in the imaging apparatus when the imaging apparatus is operating in the second operation mode.
  10.  前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成された前記画像データの数に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断し、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量を増やす
     請求項8に記載の通信装置。
    The control unit determines whether or not to increase the first battery remaining amount based on the number of the image data generated by the image sensor executing the imaging,
    The communication apparatus according to claim 8, wherein when the control unit determines that the first battery remaining amount is to be increased, the control unit increases the first battery remaining amount.
  11.  前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記制御部は、前記イメージセンサが前記撮像を実行することにより生成される予定である画像データの数に基づいて、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすか否かを判断し、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やすと前記制御部が判断した場合、前記制御部は、前記第2のバッテリー残量を増やし、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     請求項8に記載の通信装置。
    The memory further stores a second remaining battery capacity that is less than the overall capacity of the battery;
    The control unit determines whether to increase the second battery remaining amount based on the number of image data that is scheduled to be generated by the image sensor executing the imaging,
    When the control unit determines to increase the second battery remaining amount, the control unit increases the second battery remaining amount,
    The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
    The communication device according to claim 8, wherein the second battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  12.  前記制御部は、方法情報を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信し、
     前記方法情報は、前記バッテリーの充電中における前記第1のバッテリー残量および第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を示し、
     前記更新方法は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量を前記第2のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす方法であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     請求項8に記載の通信装置。
    The control unit transmits method information to the imaging apparatus by the first communication device,
    The method information indicates a method of updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount during charging of the battery,
    The update method is a method of increasing the first battery remaining amount in preference to the second battery remaining amount in accordance with an increase in the remaining amount of the battery,
    The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
    The communication device according to claim 8, wherein the second battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  13.  前記メモリはさらに、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第2のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断し、
     前記制御部は、方法情報を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信し、
     前記方法情報は、前記バッテリーの充電中における前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量の更新方法を示し、
     前記更新方法は、前記バッテリーの残量の増加に応じて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のうち優先して増やすと判断されたバッテリー残量を他のバッテリー残量よりも優先して増やす方法であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第1の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー残量は、前記第2の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     請求項8に記載の通信装置。
    The memory further stores a second remaining battery capacity that is less than the overall capacity of the battery;
    The control unit determines whether the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount is to be preferentially increased based on the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount. ,
    The control unit transmits method information to the imaging apparatus by the first communication device,
    The method information indicates a method of updating the first battery remaining amount and the second battery remaining amount during charging of the battery,
    According to the update method, the remaining battery level determined to increase preferentially among the first remaining battery level and the second remaining battery level in accordance with an increase in the remaining battery level. Is a way to increase over priority,
    The second remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the second operation mode and cannot be used in the first operation mode.
    The communication device according to claim 8, wherein the second battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the second operation mode.
  14.  前記メモリはさらに、第1のバッテリー容量および第2のバッテリー容量を記憶し、
     前記制御部は、第1の比率および第2の比率に基づいて、前記第1のバッテリー残量および前記第2のバッテリー残量のどちらを優先して増やすのかを判断し、
     前記第1のバッテリー容量は、前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であり、
     前記第2のバッテリー容量は、前記第2の動作モードに割り当てられ、かつ前記第1の動作モードに割り当てられないバッテリー容量であり、
     前記第1の比率は、前記第1のバッテリー容量に対する前記第1のバッテリー残量の比率であり、
     前記第2の比率は、前記第2のバッテリー容量に対する前記第2のバッテリー残量の比率である
     請求項13に記載の通信装置。
    The memory further stores a first battery capacity and a second battery capacity;
    The controller determines whether to increase the first battery remaining amount or the second battery remaining amount preferentially based on the first ratio and the second ratio;
    The first battery capacity is a battery capacity that is assigned to the first operation mode and not assigned to the second operation mode;
    The second battery capacity is a battery capacity that is assigned to the second operation mode and not assigned to the first operation mode;
    The first ratio is a ratio of the first battery remaining amount to the first battery capacity,
    The communication apparatus according to claim 13, wherein the second ratio is a ratio of the second battery remaining amount to the second battery capacity.
  15.  撮像装置および通信装置を有し、
     前記通信装置は、メモリ、第1の通信機、および第1の制御部を有し、
     前記撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、第2の制御部、およびユーザインターフェースを有し、
     前記メモリは、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さい第1のバッテリー残量を記憶し、
     前記撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記第1の制御部は、前記第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断し、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと前記第1の制御部が判断した場合、前記第1の制御部は、切替指示を前記第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信し、
     前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示し、
     前記第2の制御部は、前記第2の通信機によって前記切替指示を前記通信装置から受信し、
     前記第2の制御部は、受信された前記切替指示に基づいて前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替え、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記第2の制御部が実行する制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     撮像システム。
    Having an imaging device and a communication device;
    The communication device includes a memory, a first communication device, and a first control unit,
    The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, a second control unit, and a user interface,
    The memory stores a first remaining battery capacity that is smaller than the total capacity of the battery;
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the first control unit can continue the operation of the imaging device in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. Whether or not
    When the first control unit determines that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, the first control unit transmits a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device. And
    The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging device is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode,
    The second control unit receives the switching instruction from the communication device by the second communication device,
    The second control unit switches the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode based on the received switching instruction,
    In the first operation mode, the second communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and An operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed;
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor performing imaging to the communication device by the second communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control executed by the second control unit from the communication device by the second communication device,
    The third processing is processing for executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. ,
    In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. Is an operation mode for performing imaging based on an
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
  16.  撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、前記撮像装置において、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する第1のステップと、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、前記撮像装置において、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える第2のステップと、
     を有し、
     前記撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有し、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さく、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     撮像モード制御方法。
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the imaging device determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. A first step to:
    When it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode, in the imaging device, the second operation mode is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. Steps,
    Have
    The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a communication device, and a user interface,
    The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery,
    In the first operation mode, the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operating mode in which at least one of
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging to the communication device by the communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control in the imaging apparatus from the communication apparatus by the communication device,
    The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device,
    In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. Is an operation mode for performing imaging based on
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
  17.  撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、通信装置において、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する第1のステップと、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、前記通信装置において、切替指示を第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信する第2のステップと、
     を有し、
     前記通信装置は、前記第1の通信機を有し、
     撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有し、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さく、
     前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示し、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記第1の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     撮像モード制御方法。
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, the communication device determines whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on the first remaining battery level. A first step;
    A second step of transmitting a switching instruction to the imaging device by the first communication device in the communication device when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode;
    Have
    The communication device includes the first communication device,
    The imaging device has an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface,
    The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery,
    The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging device is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode,
    In the first operation mode, the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and An operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed;
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor performing imaging to the communication device by the second communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control in the imaging apparatus from the communication apparatus by the second communication device,
    The third processing is processing for executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. ,
    In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. Is an operation mode in which imaging is performed based on an operation via
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
  18.  撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する第1のステップと、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替える第2のステップと、
     を前記撮像装置のコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムであって、
     前記撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有し、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さく、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     プログラム。
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, a first step of determining whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on a first remaining battery level. When,
    A second step of switching the operation mode of the imaging device from the first operation mode to the second operation mode when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode;
    Is a program for causing the computer of the imaging device to execute,
    The imaging device includes an image sensor, a battery, a communication device, and a user interface,
    The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery,
    In the first operation mode, the communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing. Is an operating mode in which at least one of
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor executing imaging to the communication device by the communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control in the imaging apparatus from the communication apparatus by the communication device,
    The third process is a process of executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the communication device,
    In the second operation mode, the communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the image sensor is operated via the user interface. Is an operation mode for performing imaging based on
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
  19.  撮像装置が第1の動作モードで動作しているとき、第1のバッテリー残量に基づいて、前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できるか否かを判断する第1のステップと、
     前記撮像装置が前記第1の動作モードにおける動作を継続できないと判断された場合、切替指示を第1の通信機によって前記撮像装置に送信する第2のステップと、
     を通信装置のコンピュータに実行させるためのプログラムであって、
     前記通信装置は、前記第1の通信機を有し、
     撮像装置は、イメージセンサ、バッテリー、第2の通信機、およびユーザインターフェースを有し、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記バッテリーの全体の容量よりも小さく、
     前記切替指示は、前記撮像装置の動作モードを前記第1の動作モードから第2の動作モードに切り替えることを示し、
     前記第1の動作モードは、前記第1の通信機がデータリンク層およびそれよりも上位の層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができ、かつ第1の処理、第2の処理、および第3の処理の少なくとも1つが実行される動作モードであり、
     前記第1の処理は、前記イメージセンサが撮像を実行することにより得られた画像データを前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置に送信する処理であり、
     前記第2の処理は、前記撮像装置における制御に使用される制御情報を前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信する処理であり、
     前記第3の処理は、前記第2の通信機によって前記通信装置から受信された指示に基づいて、前記画像データに対する画像処理および前記画像データに対する情報の付加の少なくとも1つを実行する処理であり、
     前記第2の動作モードは、前記第2の通信機が前記データリンク層およびそれよりも上位の前記層の無線通信を前記通信装置と行うことができず、かつ前記イメージセンサが前記ユーザインターフェースを介した操作に基づいて撮像を実行する動作モードであり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードで使用でき、かつ前記第2の動作モードで使用できないバッテリー残量であり、
     前記第1のバッテリー残量は、前記第1の動作モードにおける動作に基づいて更新される
     プログラム。
    When the imaging device is operating in the first operation mode, a first step of determining whether the imaging device can continue the operation in the first operation mode based on a first remaining battery level. When,
    A second step of transmitting a switching instruction to the imaging device by a first communication device when it is determined that the imaging device cannot continue the operation in the first operation mode;
    Is a program for causing a computer of a communication device to execute,
    The communication device includes the first communication device,
    The imaging device has an image sensor, a battery, a second communication device, and a user interface,
    The remaining amount of the first battery is smaller than the entire capacity of the battery,
    The switching instruction indicates that the operation mode of the imaging device is switched from the first operation mode to the second operation mode,
    In the first operation mode, the first communication device can perform wireless communication of the data link layer and higher layers with the communication device, and the first processing, the second processing, and An operation mode in which at least one of the third processes is executed;
    The first process is a process of transmitting image data obtained by the image sensor performing imaging to the communication device by the second communication device,
    The second process is a process of receiving control information used for control in the imaging apparatus from the communication apparatus by the second communication device,
    The third processing is processing for executing at least one of image processing on the image data and addition of information on the image data based on an instruction received from the communication device by the second communication device. ,
    In the second operation mode, the second communication device cannot perform wireless communication of the data link layer and the higher layer with the communication device, and the image sensor performs the user interface. Is an operation mode in which imaging is performed based on an operation via
    The first remaining battery level is a remaining battery level that can be used in the first operation mode and cannot be used in the second operation mode;
    The first battery remaining amount is updated based on an operation in the first operation mode.
PCT/JP2017/009310 2017-03-08 2017-03-08 Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program WO2018163336A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2017/009310 WO2018163336A1 (en) 2017-03-08 2017-03-08 Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2017/009310 WO2018163336A1 (en) 2017-03-08 2017-03-08 Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018163336A1 true WO2018163336A1 (en) 2018-09-13

Family

ID=63447579

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/009310 WO2018163336A1 (en) 2017-03-08 2017-03-08 Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018163336A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004310178A (en) * 2003-04-02 2004-11-04 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Electronic device and communication method
JP2005323179A (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Toshiba Corp Multifunctional mobile communication terminal
JP2008276129A (en) * 2007-05-07 2008-11-13 Nikon Corp Camera with projection function, cellular phone with the projection function and portable electronic equipment with the projection function
JP2009200702A (en) * 2008-02-20 2009-09-03 Sharp Corp Network camera system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004310178A (en) * 2003-04-02 2004-11-04 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Electronic device and communication method
JP2005323179A (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Toshiba Corp Multifunctional mobile communication terminal
JP2008276129A (en) * 2007-05-07 2008-11-13 Nikon Corp Camera with projection function, cellular phone with the projection function and portable electronic equipment with the projection function
JP2009200702A (en) * 2008-02-20 2009-09-03 Sharp Corp Network camera system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20110001454A1 (en) Electronic Device, and Method Controlling Electronic Power Supply
EP2296371A1 (en) Electronic camera system, electronic camera, cradle, image storage apparatus, and program
KR101791860B1 (en) Communication apparatus and method for controlling communication apparatus
US9413979B2 (en) Imaging apparatus and method for recapturing an image captured in a multiple exposure shooting mode
WO2018163317A1 (en) Imaging device, imaging mode control method, and program
JP2011211391A (en) Photography request terminal, imaging apparatus, control program of photography request terminal, and control program of imaging apparatus
US9167142B2 (en) Imaging apparatus and method for controlling the same
WO2018163336A1 (en) Imaging device, communications device, imaging system, imaging mode control method, and program
JP7312012B2 (en) IMAGING DEVICE, IMAGING DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM
CN105991927B (en) Camera, sending control method and recording medium
JP2016187129A (en) Imaging apparatus, control method of the same, and program
US9503590B2 (en) Imaging apparatus, method of controlling imaging apparatus, and program
JP2013132139A (en) Electronic apparatus, imaging apparatus, and control program of electronic apparatus
CN108132705B (en) Electronic device, control method, and storage medium
KR20110021194A (en) Method and apparatus for controlling display in an image transmission
JP6604864B2 (en) Electronic device and control method thereof
JP2010074239A (en) Imaging apparatus, control method thereof, program
JP2007096854A (en) Photographing device and image transmission system
JP2006314050A (en) Image processing apparatus and its control method, and computer program and storage medium
JP4890490B2 (en) Storage device and digital camera
JP5436115B2 (en) Imaging apparatus, control method thereof, and program
JP2011061818A (en) Electronic equipment
JP2013187620A (en) Imaging device, imaging processing system, imaging processing method, and program
JP2008113377A (en) Photographing apparatus and its control method, and computer program
JP2007028302A (en) Photographing device system, charging method, photographing device and cradle

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17899565

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17899565

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP